November 2019

MANUAL
OF
FIELD SAMPLING
AND
TESTING PROCEDURES

MATERIALS DIVISION
Arkansas Department of Transportation
P.O. BOX 2261 11301 WEST BASELINE ROAD
LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72203 LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72209

November 2019
1
November 2019

ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

MATERIALS DIVISION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Forward
NOTICE OF NONDISCRIMINATION

Materials Division
Personnel
Telephone Listings & Operational Units

Acceptance Sampling & Testing of Construction Materials

Contractor Quality Control and Acceptance Testing
Department Acceptance and Verification Testing
Verification Testing Correlation Tables
English & Metric
Technician / Laboratory Certification

Guide Schedule Of Frequency Of Independent Assurance

Samples and Tests
Guide Schedule Of Desired Minimum Frequency For Acceptance Sampling and Testing
For 2003 Specifications
Guide Schedule Of Desired Minimum Frequency For Acceptance Sampling and Testing
For 2014 Specifications
Guide Schedule Of Acceptance Sampling and Testing Of Maintenance Materials

Form MT-401 Sample Identification Card

SAMPLING

ARDOT 1 Policy regarding sampling & testing materials for the benefit of others
ARDOT 2 General
ARDOT 30 Soils
ARDOT 35 Stone, Gravel and Sand
ARDOT 40 Bituminous Materials
ARDOT 50 Portland Cement, Hydrated Lime and Mineral Filler
ARDOT 51 Water
ARDOT 52 Fresh Concrete
ARDOT 55 Reinforcing and Miscellaneous Steel
ARDOT 56 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler Non-extruding and Resilient Type
ARDOT 60 Geotextile Fabric
ARDOT 62 Preformed Plastic Underdrain
ARDOT 63 Fencing Materials
ARDOT 64 Wooden Pressure Treated Fence Posts
ARDOT 65 Bituminous Coated Culvert Metal Pipe
ARDOT 71 Glass Beads
ARDOT 75 Thermoplastic Traffic Line Material
2
November 2019

ARDOT 82 Miscellaneous
ARDOT 84 Boiled Linseed Oil
ARDOT 85 Paint
TESTING

Aggregates and Soils

ARDOT 302 Deleterious Matter in Aggregate
ARDOT 304 Crushed Particles in Aggregate
ARDOT 306 Insoluble Residue
ARDOT 347 Determining Moisture Content by Speedy Moisture Tester
ARDOT 348 Moisture Content of Soils or Aggregates
ARDOT 398 Jar Slake Test
ARDOT 399 Determination of Slake Durability Index
Bituminous Plant Mix
ARDOT 449 Asphalt Content By the Nuclear Method
ARDOT 449A Calibration of Asphalt Content Gauge
ARDOT 450 Extraction of Bituminous Mixtures by Vacuum Extractor
ARDOT 451 Extraction of Bituminous Mixtures by Centrifuge Extractor
ARDOT 455A Water Sensitivity Test For Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
ARDOT 460 Method of Test For Solvent Washing And Sieve Analysis of Asphalt
Concrete
ARDOT 461 Inplace Density, % Compaction, Of Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix Using A
Nuclear Gauge
ARDOT 464 Procedure for Determination of VMA and VFA
ARDOT 465 Procedure for Sampling by Random Number
ARDOT 466 Method of Test for Verification of Slurry Seal Calibration
ARDOT 467 Method of Test for Checking of Slurry Seal Consistency
ARDOT 470 Design Method For Asphalt Concrete Cold Plant Mix
ARDOT 480 Determining Rutting Susceptibility Using a Loaded Wheel Tester (LWT)
ARDOT 481 OGBC Design Procedure
ARDOT 490 Petrographic Analysis of Non-Carbonate Aggregate
Concrete

ARDOT 530 Method for Comparison of Fine Aggregate Using Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Mortar
ARDOT 588 Method for Combining Aggregate Gradations

Paint
ARDOT 701A Flexibility of Traffic Paint
ARDOT 701DWater Resistance of Traffic Paint
ARDOT 701G Contrast Ratio of Traffic Paint

Material Certification for Job Documentation

Miscellaneous Materials Certification Sheet – Form M 170

3
November 2019

Appendix
Conversion Factors
Metric Conversion Factors

Rebar Nominal Dimensions

Rebar Markings
Rebar Mfr. Markings

Steel Bolt Designations

Steel Bolt Mfr. Head Markings

County Codes

Calibration of Rolling Straight Edge

Steel Piling Inspection

H-Piles
Steel Shell Piles

Area and Weight Welded Wire Fabric

4
November 2019

FOREWORD

This publication is issued by the Materials Division for use by Arkansas Department of
Transportation personnel. Its purpose is to make available a "Manual of Field Sampling
and Testing Procedures" for use on Department projects and purchases.

The publication shall be used in conjunction with the Standard Specifications, the
Supplemental Specifications, the Special Provisions, the plans and all supplementary
documents effective at the time of usage.

Additions and revisions will be printed and forwarded to the holders of the publication so
that each manual is maintained up to date.

Extra care should be taken to assure that reference is made to the current "Qualified
Products List" at the time of usage, regardless of the formulation date of the list and the
letting date of a contract. (The time of usage is defined as the date of the Department's
inspection and acceptance of the product for a specific project or purchase order.)

Any questions concerning the contents or use of this publication should be directed to the
Materials Division where the master "Manual of Field Sampling and Testing Procedures"
is maintained.

5
November 2019

ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
NOTICE OF NONDISCRIMINATION

The Arkansas Department of Transportation (Department) complies with all civil rights

provisions of federal statutes and related authorities that prohibit discrimination in

programs and activities receiving federal financial assistance. Therefore, the Department

does not discriminate on the basis of race, sex, color, age, national origin, religion (not

applicable as a protected group under the Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration

Title VI Problem), disability, Limited English Proficiency (LEP), or low-income status in

the admission, access to and treatment in the Department’s programs and activities, as

well as the Department’s hiring or employment practices. Complaints of alleged

discrimination and inquiries regarding the Department’s nondiscrimination polices may

be directed to Joanna P. McFadden Section Head-EEO/DBE (ADA/504/Title VI

Coordinator), P.O. Box 2261, Little Rock, AR 72203, (501) 569-2298,(Voice/TTY 711), or

the following email address: joanna.mcfadden@ardot.gov

Free language assistance for Limited English Proficient individuals is available upon

request.

This notice is available from the ADA/504/Title VI Coordinator in large print, on audiotape

and in Braille.

6
November 2019

MATERIALS DIVISION

Michael Benson Division Head 569-2186

Jon Annable Assistant Division Head -2369
Paul Tinsley Staff Geotechnical Engineer -2496
Matt Green Section Head – Geotechnical -2360
James Dean Staff Materials Engineer -2389
Dana Smith Administrative Assistant -2185
Andrea White Bookkeeper -2908
Sharelle Brown Office Assistant -2367

Jon Annable Materials Area Engr. Dist. 2 & 8 -2369

Yongsheng Zhao Materials Area Engr. Dist.1, 3, 7, 9 -2248
Tamara Boggs Materials Area Engr. Dist. 4, 5, 6, 10 -2372
Tammy Jernigan Quality Assurance Engineer -2377

James Dean Staff Materials Engineer -2389

Marc Maurer Engineer IV -2010
Dawn Richards Section Head - Chemistry Lab -2198
Robbie Robertson Laboratory Facility Manager -2189
Deb Tyler Laboratory Coordinator-Geotech/Soils -2187
Jerry Jackson Laboratory Coordinator-Str Mtls Unit -2188
Jim Mitchell Laboratory Coordinator-Bituminous Design -2191
Khari Withers Laboratory Coordinator-Sample Prep -2991
Elvis Richmond DMS Dist. 1, Wynne (870) 238-8144
David Cummings DMS Dist. 2, Pine Bluff (870) 536-1831
Rod Cole DMS Dist. 3, Hope (870) 777-5792
Celest Howard DMS Dist. 4, Fort Smith (479) 478-8537
Jonathan Brill DLT (479) 478-8537
Terry Standard DMS Dist. 5, Batesville (870) 251-3869
Shawn Hasley DMS Dist. 6, Little Rock (501) 569-2530
Mark Greenwood DLT (501) 569-2530
Tisha Reynolds DMS Dist. 7, Camden (870) 836-6885
Steve Pennington DMS Dist. 8, Russellville (479) 968-1257
Greg Norton DMS Dist. 9, Harrison (870) 743-2100
Vacant DLT (870) 743-2100
Bryant Terrell DMS Dist. 10, Paragould (870) 239-9511

Carson Sloan Geologist -2507

Paul Campbell Geologist -2507

7
November 2019

MATERIALS DIVISION
TELEPHONE LISTINGS

Below is a list of administrative and laboratory personnel and a list by laboratory

operational units showing general areas of responsibilities. Your use of these telephone
numbers will usually expedite the exchange of information, eliminate the time spent waiting
for calls to be transferred and reduce the number of calls to the Division office which must
be forwarded to the proper party.

CONCRETE & STRUCTURAL STEEL INSPECTION

Section responsibilities have been transferred to Bridge Division

Structural Steel Inspection Welding Procedures

Bridge Bearings, Expansion Devices, Precast/Prestressed Concrete& Joints

SAMPLE PREPARATION

Khari Withers Laboratory Coordinator 569-2991

Laboratory -2061
Tom Sturch Senior Materials Technician -2061
Chris Wells Senior Materials Technician -2061
Kenyada Wells Senior Materials Technician -2061

GEOTECHNICAL SOILS LAB

Deb Tyler Laboratory Coordinator 569-2187
Laboratory -2194
Bernie Eldridge Senior Materials Technician -2068
Laurn Brawley Materials Technician -2068
Greg Wendland Senior Materials Technician -2068

Hydrometer Analysis
R-Values & Other Soils Properties
Test Results:
Gravel pH
Sand Soils
Stone
Cement Treated Crushed Stone Base Course
Lime Stabilized Subgrade Pressure Grouting Designs
Proctor Tests
Sodium Sulfate Soundness
Soil Cement Designs

8
November 2019

BITUMINOUS DESIGN LAB

Jim Mitchell Laboratory Coordinator 569-2191
Laboratory -2190
Henry Williams Senior Materials Technician -2990
Vacant Senior Materials Technician -2990
Taylor Gosvener Materials Technician -2990
Absorptions Extractions
Asphalt Concrete Pavement Design Specific Gravities
Densities Mineral Fillers
CHEMISTRY LAB
Dawn Richards Section Head 569-2198
Laboratory - -2354
Lakisha Rice Chemist -2199
Cynthia Pearson Chemist -2199
Danielle Herron Chemist -2199
Ryan Snead Chemist -2199
Erosion Control Matting
Lime – Chemical Analysis Geotextile Fabric (Underseals, Filter, Cotton)
Abson Recovery (Reclaimed Asphalt) Fencing Materials
Asphalt Anti-Strip Additives Galvanizing on Steel Articles
Asphalt Binders Joint Seal Gaskets
Performance Graded Asphalt Binders Non-Asphalt Tackifiers & Mulch Cover Systems
Asphalt Extraction/Wash Solvents Silicone Joint Sealer – Curb & Gutter
Asphalt Release Agents Aluminum Epoxy Paint
Cutback Asphalts
Emulsified Asphalt Traffic Loop Wire Sealants
Silicone Additives for Asphalt Cement Aluminum Sign Materials
Backer Rod for Joint Sealing Delineators and Delineator Posts
Electrical Materials Glass Beads for Pavement Markings
Concrete Admixtures Pavement Markings (Paint, Thermoplastic, Tape,
Raised Markers)
Concrete Bridge Deck Chloride Content Retroreflectors
Concrete Curing Compounds Sign Posts
Raised Pavement Marker Adhesives Retroreflective Sheeting
Resin Anchoring Systems Temporary Striping Tape
Fly Ash Concrete Surface Finishes
Concrete Joint Sealers Class 1 Protective Surface Treatment for
Concrete (Boiled Linseed Oil)
Performed Expansion Joint Fillers Class 2 Protective Surface Treatment for
Concrete
Expansion Joint Fillers AASHTO M213 Class 3 Protective Surface Treatment for
Concrete
Portland Cement Structural Steel Paint Systems
Slag Cement Non-shrink Grouts
Modified Portland Cement Roofing Felt
Water Analysis Waterproofing and Damp proofing
Construction Raised Pavement Markers Construction Concrete Barrier Markers

9
November 2019

STRUCTURAL MATERIALS UNIT

Jerry Jackson Laboratory Coordinator 569-2188

Laboratory -2989
Brien Withers Senior Materials Technician -2989
Tony Thurman Senior Materials Technician -2989

Test Results:
Bolts Plastic Pipe
Cable Reinforcing Steel
Culvert Rockwell/Brinell Hardness
Miscellaneous Concrete Portland Cement Concrete
Products Wire Mesh

EQUIPMENT AND REPAIR

Robbie Robertson Laboratory Facility Manager 569-2189

Larry Bradbury Testing Equipment Specialist -2404
Corey Garrett Testing Equipment Specialist -2404
Mason Woods Senior Materials Technician -2404

Air Meter Equipment Compression Machines

Digital Thermometers Extractors
Hot Plates Superpave Gyratory Compactors
Ovens Profilograph
Rolling Straightedge Scales
Speedy Moisture Nuclear Density Testing Equipment

SUPPLIES, SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

Pepper Hobby Materials Stockroom Coordinator

2196

NUCLEAR GAUGES

Robbie Robertson Radiation Safety Officer 569-2189

10
November 2019

ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING & TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

The Department’s Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Edition of 2003 &
2014 requires the Contractor to perform Quality Control sampling and testing and
Acceptance sampling and testing of construction items. The Department will perform
verification testing to verify the Contractor’s testing equipment and procedures or
verification and acceptance testing both to verify the Contractor’s testing equipment and
procedures and for use in the acceptance of material and to determine payment for the
material.

Contractor Quality Control

Quality Control sampling and testing results are to be used by the Contractor for
controlling his material production and his construction procedures. Except for sampling
and testing for ACHM and Concrete gradation and Retained Stability, the frequency of
Quality Control sampling and testing is at the option of the Contractor.
Quality Control sampling and testing results are not used in the acceptance of
material or to determine payment for the material.

Contractor Acceptance Testing

The Contractor’s Acceptance sampling and testing results are used by the
Department to determine if materials meet specification requirements. These Acceptance
testing results will be incorporated into the acceptance of material and will be used to
determine payment for the material.
The Contractor must test for acceptance for the material qualities at the rates
established in the Standard Specifications.

Department Verification Testing

The Department will perform a minimum of one (1) verification test for each four (4)
Acceptance tests performed by the Contractor (in applicable sections of Division 200 and
Division 300, excluding Sections 308 & 309).
Quality Control tests which have specified frequencies will also be verified by the
Engineer. These items and the verification rates are:
Lime Treated Subgrade Thickness - One per 48,000 square yards
(40,000 square meters)
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Gradation - One per 4,000 cubic yards
(Fine and Coarse Aggregate) (750 cubic meters)
Department Verification And Acceptance Testing
The Department will test both to verify and to accept the material qualities at the
minimum rates established in the Standard Specifications (in Sections 308 & 309,
applicable sections of Division 400 through Division 800).

11
November 2019

Verification Testing

Verification will consist of comparing the results of the Engineer’s lot test to the
average of the Contractor’s sublot tests. Both verification and acceptance test shall be
taken according to ARDOT 465 or Random Number Generator in SiteManager. (These are
not split samples.)

Verification tables are to be used for comparing the Engineer’s results to the
Contractor’s results to determine if the Engineer’s test results do verify the acceptance
tests results reported by the Contractor
When verifying:
Compressive Strength of Portland Cement Concrete, multiply the
Contractor’s average result by the indicated percent in the verification tables and
then add and subtract that number to/ from the Contractor’s average result. This
will establish the range that the Engineer’s lot test should lie within to verify the
Contractor’s average result.
Liquid Limit and Plastic Limit, multiply the mean of the Contractor’s average
result and the Engineer’s test result by the indicated percent in the verification
tables and then add and subtract that number to/ from the mean. This will establish
the range that the Engineer’s lot test should lie within to verify the Contractor’s
average result
Other acceptance tests results reported by the Contractor, add and subtract
the value in the verification tables to/from the Contractor’s average result. This will
establish the range that the Engineer’s lot test should lie within to verify the
Contractor’s average result.

Even though results from both the Contractor and the Engineer may indicate that
the tested material complies with specifications, the Engineer’s results may not verify those
of the Contractor. Conversely, results from both the Contractor and the Engineer may
indicate that the tested material does not comply with specifications, but the Engineer’s
results may verify those of the Contractor.

If the Engineer’s test results do verify the acceptance tests results reported by the
Contractor the Engineer will attach a copy of the Contractor results with the Engineer’s
results for the job file and prepare a verification form.

If the Engineer’s test results do not verify the acceptance tests results reported by
the Contractor, the Contractor shall make changes to his equipment and/or procedures
so that the Engineer can verify his results. In general, the test results will not be
considered to be verified when a maximum of two (2) consecutive verification tests or
three of any five (5) consecutive verification tests do not verify the Contractor’s results.
The Engineer will note changes made by the Contractor in a memo to the
Engineer’s job file. A copy should be sent to the Area Materials Engineer.

12
November 2019

July 2015 CORRELATION TABLE TO BE USED TO VERIFY CONTRACTOR TEST RESULTS (ENGLISH)
LABORATORY GRADATION SIEVES
MAXIMUM OPTIMUM
DENSITY MOISTURE 1" & #8,10, #30, FINENESS
MATERIAL (LB/FT3) (%)** LARGER 3/4" 1/2" & 3/8" #4 16, 20 40,50 #80,100 #200 MODULUS LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT
(SPLIT SAMPLES)
EMBANKMENT, SUBGRADE,
SHAPING RDWY, SUBGR. & SHLDR
PREP, RECOMP.SHLDRS +/-5% +/- 15%

LIME TREATED SUBGRADE +/-5% +/- 15%

MEAN < 15,+/- 3*
MEAN < 21,+/- 3*
MEAN ≥ 15, +/-
MEAN ≥ 21, +/- 18%**
SELECTED MATERIAL +/-5% +/- 15% +/- 1% +/- 5% 13%**
MEAN < 21,+/- 3* MEAN < 15,+/- 3*

MEAN ≥ 21, +/- MEAN ≥ 15, +/-

AGGR. BASE COURSE +/- 10% +/- 8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 4% +/- 2.5% 13%** 18%**

CEMENT TREATED BASE +/- 2.5%

MEAN < 21,+/- 3* MEAN < 15,+/- 3*

CEMENT STABILIZED CRUSHED MEAN ≥ 21, +/- MEAN ≥ 15, +/-

STONE BASE COURSE (CSCSBC) +/- 10% +/- 8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 4% +/- 2.5% 13%** 18%**

PCC BASE See PCC-Fine & Coarse Aggregate

Check
OPEN GRADED PCC BASE +/- 10% +/- 8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% Calculations
AGGR.-ACHM Open Graded Base
Course & Slurry Seal +/- 10% +/-8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 4% +/- 3% +/- 2.5%

PCCP-FINE AGGREGATE +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 5% +/- 4% +/- 2.5%

+/- +/- Check
PCCP-COARSE AGGREGATE +/-10% +/-8% +/- 5% 2.5% 2.5% Calculations
* Add or Subtract 3 to Mean Value. ** Percentage of Mean Value added or Subtracted to Mean Value.

MAX. AIR VOIDS in

THEOR. VOIDS MINERAL
MATERIAL PERCENT (%) MOISTURE THICK. AC SP. GRAV. (AV) AGGREGATE SLUMP AIR COMPR.
COMP. (%) CONTENT (RICE) (VMA) CONTENT STRENGTH
(SAMPLES FROM SAME
MATERIAL)
EMBANKMENT, SUBGRADE, SHAPING
RDWY, SUBGR. & SHLDR PREP +/-4% +/- 4%
RECOMP. SHLDRS. +/-4%
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE +/-3% +/- 4% +/- 0.75 in
SELECTED MATERIAL +/-4% +/- 4% +/- 0.75 in
AGGR. BASE COURSE(incl.
RECONST.BASE) +/-4% +/- 4% +/- 0.75 in
CEMENT TREATED BASE
CEMENT STABILIZED CRHED ST BASE +/- 0.75 in +/-15%
PCC BASE +/- 0.75 in +/- 1in +/-1% +/-15%
OPEN GRADED PCC BASE +/- 0.75 in
ACHM +/-2% +/- 0.3% +/-0.019 +/- 1% +/- 1%
SEAL COURSE +/- 0.3%
OPEN GRADED BASE CRSE. +/- 0.3%
PORTLAND CEMENT
CONCRETE(PCC) +/- 1in +/-1% +/-15%
PCC PAVEMENT, PCC PATCHING +/- 0.75 in +/- 1in +/-1% +/-15%

13
November 2019

CORRELATION TABLE TO BE USED TO VERIFY CONTRACTOR TEST RESULTS (METRIC)

LABORATORY GRADATION SIEVES
MAXIMUM OPTIMUM 2.36, 2.00, 600, 425 180 &
DENSITY MOISTURE 25 mm & 12.5 & 19.5 1.18mm & & 300 150 FINENESS PLASTIC
MATERIAL (Kg/m3) (%)** LARGER 19 mm mm 4.75 mm 850 mcrn mcrn mcrn 75 mcrn MODULUS LIQUID LIMIT LIMIT
(SPLIT SAMPLES)
EMBANKMENT, SUBGRADE, SHAPING
RDWY, SUBGR. & SHLDR PREP,
RECOMP.SHLDRS +/-5% +/- 15%
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE +/-5% +/- 15%
MEAN < 15,+/- 3*
MEAN < 21,+/- 3*
MEAN ≥ 21, MEAN ≥ 15,
SELECTED MATERIAL +/-5% +/- 15% +/- 1% +/- 5% +/-13%** +/- 18%**

MEAN < 21,+/- 3* MEAN < 15,+/- 3*

+/- MEAN ≥ 21, MEAN ≥ 15,

AGGR. BASE COURSE +/- 10% +/- 8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 4% 2.5% +/-13%** +/-18%**
+/-
CEMENT TREATED BASE 2.5%
MEAN < 21,+/- 3*
MEAN < 15,+/- 3*
MEAN ≥ 21,
+/- +/-13%** MEAN ≥ 15,
CEMENT STABILIZED BASE +/- 10% +/- 8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 4% 2.5% +/-18%**

PCC BASE See PCC-Fine & Coarse Aggregate

Check
OPEN GRADED PCC BASE +/- 10% +/- 8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% Calculations

AGGR.-ACHM Open Graded Base +/-

Course & Slurry Seal +/- 10% +/-8% +/- 6% +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 4% +/- 3% 2.5%
+/-
PCCP-FINE AGGREGATE +/- 6% +/- 5% +/- 5% +/- 4% 2.5%
+/- Check
PCCP-COARSE AGGREGATE +/-10% +/-8% +/- 5% 2.5% +/- 2.5% Calculations
* Add or Subtract 3 to Mean Value. ** Percentage of Mean Value added or Subtracted to Mean Value.
MAX.
MATERIAL PERCENT(%) AC THEOR. SP. AIR VOIDS in MINERAL COMPR.
COMP. MOISTURE THICK. CONTENT GRAV. VOIDS AGGREGATE SLUMP AIR CONTENT STRENGTH
(%) (RICE) (AV) (VMA)
(SAMPLES FROM SAME
MATERIAL)
EMBANKMENT, SUBGRADE,
SHAPING RDWY, SUBGR. & SHLDR
PREP +/-4% +/- 4%
RECOMP. SHLDRS. +/-4%
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE +/-3% +/- 4% +/- 19 mm
SELECTED MATERIAL +/-4% +/- 4% +/- 19 mm
AGGR. BASE COURSE(incl.
RECONST.BASE) +/-4% +/- 4% +/- 19 mm
CEMENT TREATED BASE
CEMENT STABILIZED BASE +/- 19 mm +/-15%
PCC BASE +/- 19 mm +/- 25 mm +/-1% +/-15%
OPEN GRADED PCC BASE +/- 19 mm
ACHM +/-2% +/- 0.3% +/-0.019 +/-1% +/-1%
SEAL COURSE +/- 0.3%
OPEN GRADED BASE CRSE. +/- 0.3%
PORTLAND CEMENT
CONCRETE(PCC) +/- 25 mm +/-1% +/-15%
PCC PAVEMENT, PCC PATCHING +/- 19 mm +/- 25 mm +/-1% +/-15%

14
November 2019

Technician / Laboratory Certification Program

All Contractor technicians performing quality control or acceptance sampling

and testing on Department projects let after January 1, 1999 must be certified under
an approved certification program. The University of Arkansas’s Center for Training
Transportation Professionals (CTTP) can provide training for certification. Non-
certified technicians will not be permitted to conduct any quality control or
acceptance testing on Department projects let after that date.

All jobs let to contract in the August 16, 2000 letting and thereafter require that
materials testing used in quality control sampling and testing and in the acceptance
decision be performed by laboratories that are qualified through the University of
Arkansas’s Center for Training Transportation Professionals (CTTP) program for
qualifying laboratories.

An individual or Contractor may submit in writing to the CTTP the name/s of the
individual who is to be certified and the area of certification that is being sought. List all
training and certifications the individual has received from other agencies or professional
organizations. This training and the certifications will be considered by the CTTP in
determining if additional training must be obtained before an individual may be certified.

Certification of technicians and qualification of laboratories will be in five areas of

materials testing: 1) Basic Aggregates; 2) Soils/Earthwork; 3) Asphalt Plant and Field
Testing; 4) Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Testing; and 5) Portland Cement Concrete
(PCC) Strength Testing. AASHTO T 141(Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete), AASHTO T
23 (Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field), and AASHTO T 119 (Slump
of Hydraulic Cement Concrete) are required to be performed by a certified technician, but
are not required to be performed by a qualified laboratory. Before a technician may
become certified in Soils/Earthwork, Asphalt Plant and Field Testing, and Portland Cement
Concrete Testing, the technician must first attend a Basic Aggregates course. An individual
with an ACI Level 1 certification will be certified by the CTTP for Portland Cement Concrete
Testing upon completion of the Basic Aggregates course.

All Contractor, private testing lab, or supplier technicians performing quality

control or acceptance sampling and testing of concrete on Department projects let
to contract after January 1, 2010 must be certified to perform AASHTO T 22,
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. This certification is the
ACI Concrete Strength Testing Technician certification. This certification is
required for performing quality control or acceptance sampling and testing of any
concrete used under the provisions of Divisions 300, 500, 600, 700, and 800 of the
Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

Requests by the Contractor for scheduling technicians for training at the CTTP is
on a first come basis, except Contractors with awarded contracts will be given priority over
Contractors that do not have contracts requiring certified technicians.

15
November 2019

Each qualified laboratory used for a project shall be a permanent laboratory listed
on the CTTP website at www.cttp.org. The location shown on the CTTP list must match
the actual physical location of the laboratory in order for that laboratory to be acceptable
for project testing. Laboratories must advise CTTP whenever a laboratory changes
locations.

Testing performed by a qualified laboratory is only acceptable if it is done in

the area of materials testing that the lab is qualified and for the specific
AASHTO/ARDOT tests that it has requested qualification. The test methods that
each laboratory is qualified to perform are listed on the CTTP website after the
laboratory has been inspected by CTTP. As an example, field testing of concrete
for air content can only be performed by a technician certified in PCC Testing and
using equipment that is in the Quality Manual of a laboratory qualified in PCC and
AASHTO test methods T 152. Each laboratory that has requested to be qualified by
CTTP is expected to check the calibration of its materials testing equipment and
maintain those records in their Quality Manual. Equipment used in performing test
methods for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete, Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field, and Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete shall meet
equipment requirements of the specific test method. The Resident Engineer may
review these records when the Department’s test results fail to verify a Contractor’s
test results.

Contact Ms. Frances Griffith, Administrator of Training Transportation

Professionals (CTTP) at the CTTP at the Mack-Blackwell Transportation Center
(MBTC) at (479) 575-3997 when requesting laboratory qualification.

16
November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF FREQUENCY OF INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE SAMPLES AND TESTS FOR 2014 STD. SPECS.

MATERIAL TYPE OF TEST MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF TESTING REMARKS

1 FOR EACH 125,000 CY (190,000 TONS)

RATES FOR
GRADATION, LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTIC LIMIT
CONTRACTOR
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 75,000
CY (95,000 TONS)
SPECIAL PROVISION EMBANKMENT
MATERIAL
1 FOR EACH 250,000 CY (380,000 TONS)
RATES FOR
GRADATION, LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTIC LIMIT
DEPARTMENT
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 125,000
CY (190,000 TONS)

1 FOR EACH 100,000 CY (150,000 TONS)

RATES FOR
DENSITY AND MOISTURE CONTENT
CONTRACTOR
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 75,000
210 EMBANKMENT (See Note 1) CY (115,000 TONS)
212 SUBGRADE
1 FOR EACH 200,000 CY (300,000 TONS)
RATES FOR
DENSITY AND MOISTURE CONTENT
DEPARTMENT
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 150,000
CY (230,000 TONS)

GRADATION, LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTIC LIMIT 1 FOR EACH 20,000 CY (25,000 TONS)

RATES FOR
CONTRACTOR
302 SELECTED MATERIAL (ONLY GRADATION FOR AGGREGATE BASE COURSE, NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 15,000
303 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE CEMENT STABILIZED CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE, CY (19,000 TONS)
307 CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE OPEN GRADED PCC BASE COURSE AND OPEN GRADED
308 CEMENT STABILIZED CRUSHED STONE ASPHALT BASE COURSE)
BASE COURSE
310 OPEN GRADED PCC BASE COURSE
417 OPEN GRADED ASPHALT BASE GRADATION, LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTIC LIMIT 1 FOR EACH 40,000 CY (50,000 TONS)
COURSE
RATES FOR
DEPARTMENT
(ONLY GRADATION FOR AGGREGATE BASE COURSE,
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 30,000
CEMENT STABILIZED CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE, CY (38,000 TONS)
OPEN GRADED PCC BASE COURSE AND OPEN GRADED
ASPHALT BASE COURSE)
RATES FOR
DENSITY AND MOISTURE CONTENT 1 FOR EACH 20,000 CY (25,000 TONS)
216 SCARIFYING AND RECOMPACTING CONTRACTOR

17
November 2019

SHOULDERS NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 15,000

301 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE CY (19,000 TONS)
302 SELECTED MATERIAL
303 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
305 RECONSTRUCTED BASE COURSE 1 FOR EACH 40,000 CY (50,000 TONS)
307 CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE RATES FOR
DENSITY AND MOISTURE CONTENT
DEPARTMENT
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 30,000
CY (38,000 TONS)

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF FREQUENCY OF INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE SAMPLES AND TESTS FOR 2014 STD. SPECS.

MATERIAL TYPE OF TEST MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF TESTING REMARKS

1 FOR EACH 15,000 TONS (12,000 CY)

403 AGGREGATE FOR ASPHALT SURFACE RATES FOR
GRADATION
TREATMENT NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 1,500 DEPARTMENT
TONS (1,200 CY)

ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, VMA, MAX

THEORETICAL SPECIFIC GRAVITY(Gmm), & DENSITY
(See Note 2) 1 FOR EACH 30,000 TONS - PER COURSE
RATES FOR
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 7,500 CONTRACTOR
TONS
(ONLY ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT FOR SLURRY SEAL
AND OPEN GRADED ASPHALT BASE COURSE)
410 ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT/WARM MIX:
BASE, BINDER, SURFACE COURSE
417 OPEN GRADED ASPHALT BASE COURSE
418 SLURRY SEAL ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, VMA, MAX
THEORETICAL SPECIFIC GRAVITY(Gmm), & DENSITY
(See Note 2)
1 FOR EACH JOB WITH MORE THAN 40,000 TONS - PER RATES FOR
COURSE DEPARTMENT
(ONLY ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT FOR SLURRY SEAL
AND OPEN GRADED ASPHALT BASE COURSE)

308 CEMENT STAB CRUSHED STONE BASE SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT
COURSE (NOTE 3) CORE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH 1 FOR EACH 10,000 CY
501 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE RATES FOR
PAVEMENT (NOTE 3) NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 10,000 CONTRACTOR
501 HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONCRETE (FOR CEMENT STAB. CRUSHED STONE BS. CRS. CORE CY
PAVEMENT(NOTE 3) COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ONLY)
503 CONTINOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE
PAVEMENT (NOTE 3)
503 HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONTINOUSLY SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT 1 FOR EACH 40,000 CY RATES FOR
REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT DEPARTMENT

18
November 2019

(NOTE 3) NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 40,000

507 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (NO TESTING REQUIRED FOR CEMENT STAB. CRUSHED CY
PAVEMENT PATCHING (NOTE 3) STONE BS. CRS.)
511 PCC SHOULDER (ADD-ON) (NOTE 3)

1 FOR EACH 1,000 CY

SLUMP, AIR CONTENT (IF APPLICABLE), & COMPRESSIVE RATES FOR
STRENGTH CONTRACTOR
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 300 CY

802 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE MIXTURES:

CLASS S, CLASS S(AE), CLASS B, SEAL
1 FOR EACH 4,000 CY
SLUMP, AIR CONTENT (IF APPLICABLE), & COMPRESSIVE RATES FOR
STRENGTH DEPARTMENT
NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON JOBS WITH LESS THAN 600 CY

UNIFORM CONVERSION
THICKNESS FACTOR
NOTES:
6" 0.16667 1. TOTAL FOR EMBANKMENT IS LINE ITEM AMOUNT OF COMPACTED EMBANKMENT OR IS DETERMINED BY ADDING LINE
ITEM AMOUNT OF BORROW AND EXCAVATION (UNCLASSIFIED, ROCK AND COMMON) THEN SUBTRACT LINE ITEM FOR
7" 0.19444 WASTE.
8" 0.22222 2. CHECK QUALITY MANUAL FOR COMPLIANCE OF GYRATORY COMPACTOR CALIBRATION. THE CHARACTERISTICS TO BE
TESTED ARE THE SAME AS THOSE SPECIFIED FOR ACCEPTANCE.
9" 0.25000
10" 0.27778 3. CONVERSION FACTOR CHART SHOULD BE USED TO CONVERT SY TO CY.
11" 0.30556
12" 0.33333
13" 0.36111
14" 0.38889
REMARKS:
A QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM MUST PROVIDE FOR AN ACCEPTANCE PROGRAM AND AN INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (IA) PROGRAM. THE PURPOSE OF THE IA PROGRAM IS TO
ASSURE THAT ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION TESTERS AND EQUIPMENT REMAIN CAPABLE OF PERFORMING THE REQUIRED TESTS PROPERLY. ALTHOUGH THE IA PROGRAM IS
ADMINISTERED BY THE MATERIALS DIVISION, A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM REQUIRES THE COOPERATION AND PARTICIPATION OF THE CONTRACTOR, RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER AND
MATERIALS DIVISION IN ORDER TO INSURE THAT THE REQUIRED SAMPLES ARE OBTAINED AND CORRELATED IN A MEANINGFUL AND TIMELY MANNER.

THE MATERIALS DIVISION WILL UTILIZE WITNESSING, SEPARATE SAMPLES, SPLIT SAMPLES, PROFICIENCY SAMPLES, AND EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN COMBINATION
AS AN INDEPENDENT CHECK OF THE CONTRACTOR’S AND RE’S FIELD SAMPLING AND TESTING PROCEDURES. GENERALLY, FIELD SAMPLES WILL BE OBTAINED IN THE SAME MANNER AS
THOSE FOR ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION AND WILL BE TESTED BY THE DISTRICT MATERIALS SUPERVISOR (DMS) OR THE DISTRICT LABORATORY TECHNICIAN (DLT) USING
EQUIPMENT ASSIGNED TO THE DMS. ALL INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE TESTING FOR IA COMPARISONS SHALL BE PERFORMED UTILIZING DIFFERENT EQUIPMENT. IF DEEMED
APPROPRIATE BY THE MATERIALS DIVISION, THE DMS COULD USE EQUIPMENT NOT ASSIGNED TO THE DMS AND/OR QUALIFIED PERSONNEL NOT ASSOCIATED WITH THE JOB TO
PERFORM IA TESTING.

19
November 2019

CLASS A, CLASS M AND PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE USED FOR MISCELLANEOUS PURPOSES GENERALLY ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE IA PROGRAM OF TESTING. THE NUMBER OF IA
SAMPLES SHOWN IN THE ABOVE TABLE ARE CONSIDERED MINIMUMS AND ADDITIONAL SAMPLES MAY BE TAKEN AT ANY TIME. IA SAMPLING WILL BE PLANNED SO THAT AN ADEQUATE
NUMBER WILL BE OBTAINED BUT NOT ALL AT THE SAME TIME.

A PROMPT COMPARISON AND DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE MADE OF TEST RESULTS OBTAINED BY THE TESTER(S) BEING EVALUATED AND THE IA TESTER. THIS WILL BE ACCOMPLISHED
BY THE DMS CORRELATING IA SAMPLE TEST RESULTS WITH JOB ACCEPTANCE AND/OR VERIFICATION RESULTS. THIS CORRELATION WILL BE A COMPARISON OF TEST RESULTS OF IA
SAMPLES, AND OF SEPARATE AND/OR OF SPLIT SAMPLES AND/OR THE LAST FIVE (5) (IF AVAILABLE) ACCEPTANCE (INCLUDING VERIFICATION) SAMPLES. A COPY OF THE IA SAMPLE TEST
RESULTS AND CORRELATION WILL BE SENT BY THE MATERIALS DIVISION'S STAFF AREA ENGINEER (AE) TO THE RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER. THE RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER WILL
FORWARD COPIES TO THE APPROPRIATE OFFICE(S) AS NECESSARY. IA SAMPLE TEST RESULTS AND THE CORRELATION WILL BE FILED IN THE RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER JOB FILE.

IF IA SAMPLE TEST RESULTS DO NOT CORRELATE WITH ACCEPTANCE AND/OR VERIFICATION TEST RESULTS, THE MATERIALS AND FIELD SAMPLING PROCEDURES MUST BE REVIEWED.
QUESTIONS TO BE ANSWERED ARE: 1. WERE THE SAMPLES FOR IA AND ACCEPTANCE AND/OR VERIFICATION REPRESENTATIVE?; 2. WERE PROPER SAMPLING
TECHNIQUES/PROCEDURES USED TO OBTAIN SAMPLES?; 3. WAS THE CORRECT TESTING EQUIPMENT PROPERLY CALIBRATED AND IN GOOD WORKING ORDER FOR PERFORMING THE
TEST?; 4. WERE TESTS PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE METHODS SET FORTH IN THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS?; 5. WAS THE LACK OF CORRELATION DUE TO MATERIAL
VARIABILITY?

IF THE RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER’S TEST RESULTS DO NOT CORRELATE, INDEPENDENT REVIEWS WILL BE CONDUCTED BY THE RE ON HIS EQUIPMENT AND TESTING PROCEDURES
AND BY THE MATERIALS AE ON THE DMS’S EQUIPMENT AND TESTING PROCEDURES. ONCE REVIEWS ARE COMPLETED, THE RE, THE MATERIALS DIVISION'S AE, AND THE DMS WILL
DISCUSS THEIR FINDINGS, WRITE A BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE FINDINGS AND INITIATE CORRECTIVE ACTION IF NECESSARY. EACH INDIVIDUAL WILL SIGN THE SUMMARY OF REPORTED
FINDINGS AND FORWARD IT TO THE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER.

IF THE CONTRACTOR’S TEST RESULTS DO NOT CORRELATE, THE CONTRACTOR MUST CONDUCT A REVIEW (ASSISTED BY THE RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER) ON HIS EQUIPMENT AND
TESTING PROCEDURES AS OUTLINED ABOVE. THE CONTRACTOR MUST PARTICIPATE IN THE DISCUSSION OF THE FINDING AND SIGN THE SUMMARY REPORT.

IF THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF IA SAMPLES ARE NOT OBTAINED, A MEMORANDUM OUTLINING THE REASON(S) MUST BE SENT (BY THE RESIDENT/STAFF ENGINEER) TO THE
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER. MISSED OR NON-CORRELATING IA SAMPLES MUST BE LISTED AS EXCEPTIONS ON THE MATERIALS CERTIFICATE.

20
November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING

OF
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

Standard Specifications for HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION, Edition 2003

21
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

ACRYL-BUTA-STYR(ABS) PIPE
AASHTO M 264 611 . QPL 1

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

ACTUATED CONTROLLER 701 ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE.
QPL 1 AND /OR APPROVED BY ENGINEER. ALL ADMIXTURES USED IN A
ADMIXTURES, PCC 206, 309, MIX SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EACH OTHER AS ADVISED BY THE
(INCLUDES RETARDERS, AIR ENTRAINING AGENTS, 500, 600, MANUFACTURER.
ACCELERATORS, AND SUPERPLASTICIZERS) 700, 800

MATERIALS MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.

SEE QPL 1 OR CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
CONTR. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND APPROVAL
631, 632, OF GRAD., DECANT. & FINENESS
AGGREGATE: PC CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES 701, 702, MOD. (FM): IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE AMOUNT OF
(INCLUDES CLASSES A, B, S, S[AE], SEAL AND 711, 730, , ONE (FINE AND COARSE) PER SUBLOT DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES WILL BE TESTED. ALL FINE AGGREGATE SHALL
OVERLAY CONCRETE) 802, 816 OF 500 CU. YDS. [400 cu m] OF BE FREE OF INJURIOUS AMOUNT OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES.
822 CONCRETE.
Minimum 1 PER BRIDGE STRUCTURE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
QUALITY CONTROL FIELD TEST REPORTS.

CONTR. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

309, 501, OF GRAD., DECANT. & FINENESS
503, 507, MOD. (FM):
AGGREGATE: PC CONCRETE PAVEMENT
511 ONE (FINE AND COARSE) PER SUBLOT
(INCLUDES HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONCRETE MATERIALS MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
OF 1000 CU. YDS. [750 cu m] OF
PAVEMENT, CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE SEE QPL 1 OR CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
CONCRETE.
PAVEMENT, HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONTINUOUSLY AND APPROVAL
REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT, PCC BASE, PCCP
PATCHING AND PCC SHOULDER [ADD-ON]) ARDOT PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING FOR GRADATION. IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE AMOUNT OF
DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES WILL BE TESTED. ALL FINE AGGREGATE SHALL
BE FREE OF INJURIOUS AMOUNT OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES.

THE RATE OF VERIFICATION TESTING WILL BE 1 PER LOT OF 4000

CU. YDS. OF MIX

R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL

QUALITY CONTROL FIELD TEST REPORTS.

22
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
(1) 75 LBS [35 kg] FOR
GRADATION, L.L. & P.I., DUST
RATIO, % CRUSHED PARTICLES &
% DELETERIOUS

(2) 200 LBS [90 kg] FOR NUMBER MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR
(1) ABOVE AND MAXIMUM DENSITY TRANSFER. SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
TEST SAMPLING AND APPROVAL
QPL 1
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE %
TESTING OF GRADATION, DELETERIOUS OR % CRUSHED WILL BE TESTED.
PLASTICITY INDEX, DUST RATIO
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
209, 303, (CALCULATED), THICKNESS (IF
(INCLUDES REMOVING AND REPLACING BASE SPECIFIED), DENSITY AND
306, 310,
COURSE AND ASPHALT SURFACING) MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
405, 504,
731, 816 1000 TONS [1000 t] ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

IF CRUSHED STONE, RE MAY WAIVE P.I. ACCEPTANCE TESTING

AFTER FIRST FIVE TESTS INDICATE MATERIAL IS NON-PLASTIC
LIQUID LIMIT TESTING IS REQUIRED PER 303.02.
R.E. PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING OF GRADATION,
RE PERFORMS MOISTURE CHECK PER SEC. 109
PLASTICITY INDEX, DUST RATIO
(CALCULATED), THICKNESS (IF
SPECIFIED), DENSITY AND
MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER
4000 TONS [4000 t] / CU. . YDS
(cu m)

AGGREGATE IN SLURRY SEAL 418 SEE SLURRY SEAL

ALUMINUM PRODUCTS 806 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MAT'LS DIV. APPROVES REPORT.

ALUMINUM COATED STEEL PRODUCTS 806 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MAT'LS DIV. APPROVES REPORT.

ALUMINUM IMPREGNATED ASPHALT PAINT 724 APPROVED BY ENGINEER. (CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION IF NEEDED)

ANCHOR BOLTS, BRIDGE 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MAT'LS DIV. APPROVES REPORT.

ANCHOR BOLTS, BRIDGE 807 QPL 1

EPOXY AND NON-SHRINK GROUT
609, 610,
MAT'LS DIV. APPROVES REPORT.
613,631,
ANCHOR BOLTS, MISCELLANEOUS MFR. CERTIFIED TEST SAMPLED AT THE REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
724, 730

QPL 1

400, 504, ENTER BRAND NAME ON REPORT OF INSPECTION AT ASPHALT PLANT

ANTI-STRIP ADDITIVE, ASPHALT MIX (M389)
615, 731
NOTE: ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN

307, 308, QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209)(IN

ASPHALT, CUT-BACK 401,402, UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
403, 411, SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT (1 Qt.)
414, 415,, , NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING
731
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION

23
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209) )(IN
SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
307, 308,
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE
ASPHALT, EMULSIFIED 401, 402,
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT (1 Qt.) NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING
403
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION
ASPHALT, FIBER MODIFIED, WATERPROOF'G
813, 815 QPL 1
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION
ASPHALT, MOPPING, WATERPROOF'G 813, 815 QPL 1 RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION.
QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209) )(IN
SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
ASPHALT, TACK UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE
401
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT ( 1 Qt.) NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING

RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION

400, 504, QPL 1
ASPHALT BINDER 615, 731, NOTE: ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN
732
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION
CONTRACTOR DEVELOPED MIX DESIGN SUBMITTED TO DMS FOR REVIEW
AND SUBMITTED TO MATERIALS ENGINEER. THE DEPARTMENT WILL
PERFORM VERIFICATION TESTING AS NEEDED.
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OF GRADATION AND ASPHALT
ASPHALT CONCRETE COLD MIX 411, 414 R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
CONTENT:
ONE PER LOT OF 750 TONS [ 750 t] ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

MIX WILL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AT START OF PRODUCTION

OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 90 CALENDAR DAYS
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
TESTING:
WATER SENSITIVITY: ONCE DURING CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGNS SUBMITTED TO MATERIALS DIVISION FOR
FIRST THREE DAYS OF PRODUCTION REVIEW AT LEAST FIVE (5) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO USE. IF ASPHALT
OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF BINDER OR AGGREGATE SOURCES NOT ON QPL, ALLOW AT LEAST 10
MORE THAN 90 CALENDAR DAYS WORKING DAYS FOR SAMPLING AND TESTING BEFORE REVIEW.
AGGREGATE GRADATION: ONE PER
750 TONS [750 t].
MIX WILL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AT START OF PRODUCTION
400, 414, OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 90 CALENDAR DAYS.
ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT MIX CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE
415, 504,
615, 731 TESTING: ASPHALT BINDER
CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, VMA AND R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
DENSITY ONE PER SUBLOT OF 750 ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TONS [750 t]
ARDOT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTS FOR ACCEPT. AND ADJUSTMENT ON
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE / VERIFICATION MATERIAL USED TO REPLACE UNACCEPTABLE MATERIAL REMOVED BY
TESTING: ASPHALT BINDER THE CONTRACTOR.
CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, VMA, AND
DENSITY; RICE (VERIFICATION ONLY)
ONE PER LOT OF 3000 TONS [3000 t]
ASPHALT IN SLURRY SEAL SEE SLURRY SEAL & ASPHALT, EMULSIFIED
418
QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209 )(IN
SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
ASPHALT PENETRATING PRIME UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE
400, 731
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT ( 1 Qt.) NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING.

RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION

ASPHALT PRIMER WATERPROOF'G
ASTM D 41 813, 815 QPL 1

ASPHALT RELEASE AGENT

410 QPL 1
SEE REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT MATERIAL USED AND FOR
ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT 402
SEE MINERAL AGGREGATE IN ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT.

24
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
DENSITY & MOISTURE FOR
ACCEPTANCE:
(1) PIPE CULVERTS - ONE PER 125
LINEAL FEET OF TYPE PIPE CULVERT
SPECIFIED.
606, 607,
608, 609, (2) BOX CULVERTS - TWO PER
BACKFILL MATERIAL R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
610, 724 STRUCTURE.
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
801
(3) BRIDGE ENDS - ONE PER
LAYER.

ALL ACCEPTANCE TESTING BY

ARDOT

BAR MAT REINFORCEMENT

SEE REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC.

502, RE VERIFY DIPPED PLASTIC PROTECTION

507,606, OR PREMOLDED PLASTIC TIPS FOR METAL
COATING THICKNESS CHECKED BY R.E.
BAR SUPPORTS 609, 610, SUPPORTS
(HI-CHAIRS, SLAB & BEAM BOLSTERS) 613, 631,
2
640, 701 RE CERT
804
2
BLOTTER COURSE MATERIAL RE CERT
401
SAMPLED BY OR AT THE REQUEST OF
608, 613,
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS MAT'LS. DIV. MFR. CERTIFIED TEST.. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV
617
CHECK TO SEE IF PRE-TESTED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
617, 631, ONE PER SIZE PER LENGTH PER HEAT R.E. VERIFIES MARKINGS. (SEE ADD’L REQ. FOR HIGH STRENGTH
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, (HIGH STRENGTH) MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
807 PER MANUFACTURER PER 2000 ITEM. GUARDRAIL BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS)
APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
BORROW
(ALSO SPECIAL PROVISION GRANULAR
210 SEE COMPACTED EMBANKMENT
BORROW)

BRIDGE BEARING PADS, PREFORMED FABRIC MFR. CERTIFIED TEST.

802, 807 APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV ON REQUEST.

BRIDGE BEARING PLATES, BRONZE

(INCLUDING SELF-LUBRICATING) 802,807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV ON REQUEST.

BRIDGE BEARING PLATES, COPPER-ALLOY 802, 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV ON REQUEST.

BRIDGE BEARINGS, ELASTOMERIC PADS 802, 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV ON REQUEST.

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE

ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND
TESTING R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
MFR./SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION TO NCHRP-350,
BRIDGE END TERMINAL 734 FOR CONCRETE COMPONENT SEE ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TL-3
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR
STRUCTURES;PORTLAND CEMENT MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS APPROVED BY ENGINEER
CONCRETE (PCC)
BRIDGE NAME PLATE 812 QPL 1

BRIDGE RAILING 806 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV

BURLAP-POLYETHYLENE SHEETING SEE POLYETHYLENE – BURLAP MAT PCC CURING.

CEMENT SEE PORTLAND CEMENT

25
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

AT LEAST 30 DAYS PRIOR TO

BEGINNING OF TREATMENT RE
SUBMIT SAMPLE SIZE OF 500 LBS.
[225 kg] MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE DESIGN AND DETERMINES MAXIMUM
DENSITY; IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE %
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING DELETERIOUS WILL BE TESTED.
OF GRADATION, L.L. & P.I., DUST
RATIO, % DELETERIOUS, THICKNESS NOTE: AGGR. MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE
(CORES) AND COMPRESSIVE FOR TRANSFER. SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE OF
CEMENT STABILIZED CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE 308, 504 STRENGTH (CORES): SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
ONE PER SUBLOT OF 1000 CU. YDS.
[750 cu m] R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE / VERIFICATION
TESTING OF GRADATION, L.L. & P.I.,
DUST RATIO, % DELETERIOUS,
THICKNESS (CORES) AND:
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (CORES):
ONE PER LOT OF 4000 CU. YDS. [3000
cu m]
RE AT LEAST 30 DAYS PRIOR TO
BEGINNING OF WORK, SUBMIT THE MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE DESIGN AND DETERMINES MAXIMUM
FOLLOWING SAMPLE SIZE: LAB DENSITY;
IF PLUS 4.75 mm [NO. 4] MATERIAL
10% MAX. 250 LBS. [115 kg]
IF PLUS 4.75 mm [NO. 4] MATERIAL NOTE: AGGR. MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE
OVER 10% 500 LBS. [225 kg] FOR TRANSFER. SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
302, 307,
CEMENT TREATED BASE CRSE. SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
504
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
THICKNESS, GRADATION, PLASTICITY
INDEX,: DENSITY AND MOISTURE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
CONTENT: ONE PER 12,000 SQ. YDS. ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
[10,000 sq m]
R.E. PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING.

CHAIRS, REINFORCEMENT PRESET 503 R.E. CERT. 2

CHANNEL POST SIGN SUPPORT 729 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

801
COMMON EXCAVATION – STRUCTURES SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

CONTRACTOR MAXIMUM
LABORATORY DENSITY: GRANULAR BORROW - PLASTICITY INDEX AND GRADATION TESTING
ONE FOR EACH SOIL TYPE WITH A REQUIRED.
COMPACTED EMBANKMENT CONTRACTOR TO SPLIT MAXIMUM DENSITY SAMPLE WITH RE FOR
MINIMUM OF ONE PER JOB
(ALSO BORROW, SHAPING ROADWAY SECTION, VERIFICTION (RE TO RUN AT LEAST ONE SPLIT SAMPLE FOR VERIFICATION
SPECIAL PROVISION GRANULAR BORROW PER PROJECT. REMAINING SPLIT SAMPLES TO BE RUN ON AN AS NEEDED
210, 213, CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
AND, [WHEN NOT WASTED], EXCAVATION BASIS)
OF DENSITY & % MOISTURE:
[COMMON, ROCK & UNCLASSIFIED])
ONE FOR EACH 3000 CU.YD.
[2500 cu m] R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
MINIMUM OF ONE PER LAYER ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

CONCRETE BARRIER WALL SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES; REINFORCING
STEEL (BARS)
631 R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
QPL1
SEE JOINT FILLER TYPE 2 FOR JOINT FILLER MATERIAL.

26
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
CONCRETE DITCH PAVING 605 ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TESTING
QPL1
SEE JOINT FILLER, PREF. ASPH., AASHTO M 213.

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
CONCRETE ISLAND 632
TESTING
QPL1
SEE JOINT FILLER, PREF. ASPH., AASHTO M 213.

. QPL1
CONCRETE PULL BOXES 711 SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
PERFORMANCE TEST UNDER 717 INCLUDED..
SEE REINFORCING STEEL (BARS)

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
CONCRETE SPILLWAY 614
TESTING
QPL1
IF PRECAST SEE PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MISC.

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES AND ALSO

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE HANDRAILING
CONCRETE STEPS ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND SEE STEEL PRODUCTS FOR HANDRAILING.
633
INCLUDES CONCRETE WALKS TESTING
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

309, 500,
605, 606,
609, 610,
COPOLYMER/SYNTHETIC BLANKET 613-615,
R.E. CERT. 3
AASHTO M 171 617,
631-634,
732, 802,
822
NOTE: MUST CONFORM TO AASHTO M 138
COPPER WATER STOPS & FLASHING 802 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

NOTE: ASPHALT COATED PIPE:

504, 606, FIELD INSPECT COATING - 0.05 IN [1.3
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE, COATED & UNCOATED R.E. RETAINS CERTS.OF COMPLIANCE QPL1
609, 611, mm] MIN. AT CORRUGATION
(INCLUDE FLARED END SECTIONS) R.E. DOCUMENTS ASPHALT COATING
621, 805 CRESTS (INSIDE & OUTSIDE). THICKNESS 2
SEE SAMPLING METHOD ARDOT 65.

CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE TUBING, QPL1

611
UNDERDRAIN

504, 606,
COUPLING BANDS SAME REQS. AS CORRUG. METAL PIPE.
609, 611,
R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE RIGID PAD:SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND MFR./SUPPLIER CERTIFY THAT MEETS NCHRP-350
CRASH CUSHIONS 732
TESTING OR MASH FOR TL-3 CRASH CUSHION.

CURBING 634
SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

27
 November 2019

R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL

ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
SEE JOINT SEALER, CURB & GUTTER

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
728 SEE SIGNS, STANDARD
DELINEATOR

DELINEATOR, STEEL POST 618, 728 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

DITCH CHECKS
621 R.E. CERT. 3 ROCK-SEE STONE BACKFILL
STRAW, SAND BAG, ROCK

APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

501, 503
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
DOWEL BARS RESIN ANCHORING SYSTEM FOR SECURING BARS LISTED IN QPL
CONTRACTOR CERT. ON EPOXY COATING
507, 821

APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS 808 QPL1

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR 700 ENGINEER APPROVAL – TRAFFIC.
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE

ELECTRIC SERVICE POLES 716 SEE TREATED WOOD POLES

QPL1

501, 502, NOTE: IF REINFORCING STEEL SUPPLIER NOT ON QPL CONTACT MAT'LS
EPOXY COATED REINFORCING STEEL
804 CERT. OF DELIVERY. DIV. FOR ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

EPOXY COATERS LISTED IN QPL

QPL1
EROSION MATTING, ARDOT CLASS 1, 2 & 3 621, 626

815, 818
FABRIC, ASPHALT TREATED ASTM D173 QPL1

QPL1
FELT MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 815
(ASTM D 226 , TYPE II)

QPL1
FELT, ROOFING FOR BRIDGE JTS.
802 NOTE: PLANS MAY REFER TO MATERIAL AS 2.2 kg/sq m (45#) ROOFING
ASTM D 224, TYPE 1
FELT

FENCE, CHAIN LINK AND TYPE A & B 619 QPL1

NOTE: SEE FENCE POST IF WOOD
2
619 R.E. CERT
FENCE, TYPE C & D

APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

ONE SAMPLE OF 30 WOOD CORES
CHECK WITH MAT'LS. DIV. FOR PRETESTED POSTS.
FENCE POST, WOODEN, TREATED 619 PER 1,000 POSTS
NO TEST REQ'D. FOR TYPE C & D.
NONE IF LESS THAN 50 POSTS
DELIVERY TICKETS WITH ARDOT SEALS.

FERTILIZER
R.E. CERT. 5
620, 621,
622, 623,
624

28
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
(1)NOTE: AGGR. MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS
AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
(1)ARDOT ACCEPT. TESTING FOR SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND
FILTER BLANKET; (1) STONE GRAD: ONE PER 500 TONS [450 t], 150 APPROVAL.
303, 816
(2) FABRIC LBS. ['70 kg] (1)R. E. APPROVES FIELD TEST REPORTS
MINIMUM OF ONE PER PROJECT.
(2) QPL1

FILTER FABRIC 611, 625, QPL1

WITH UNDERDRAIN, RIPRAP, & GABIONS 629, 816

606
FLARED END SECTION
SEE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE/ PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS MISC.

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER 703 ENGINEER APPROVAL – TRAFFIC.
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE

FLOOD GATES, AUTOMATIC 616 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV

RE ACCEPTANCE: UNIT WEIGHT AND CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGN APPROVED BY R.E.

FLOWABLE SELECT MATERIAL 206 FLOW ONE PER 50 CU. YD. [38 cu m] MATERIALS LISTED ON QPL
WITH MINIMUM OF ONE PER PROJECT. R.E. APPROVES ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

QPL1
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE
206, 307,
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
FLY ASH 308, 309,
501, 503,
ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER
802
SEE QPL FOR INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS.

ONE BASKET AND 6 FT. [2 m] OF

GABIONS 629 LACING WIRE PER PROJECT APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
NOTE: IF LACING WIRE NOT USED,
CONTACT MAT'LS DIV.

NOTE: MAT'L MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR

TRANSFER. SEE CURRENT QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
GABIONS, STONE FOR FILLING 629 R.E. CERT. 2
SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
QPL1

QPL1
617, 633,
GALVANIZING, FIELD REPAIRING . NOTE: DRY FILM THICKNESS REQUIRED WILL DEPEND ON ORIGINAL
807
THICKNESS SPEC.

GATES, ALUMINUM/STEEL
619
R.E. CERT. 2

GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 621, 625 QPL1

GLASS BEADS, TRAFFIC MARKINGS

604, 718, CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION

QPL1(PERMANENT BEADS)
719 AND INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS
MFR. CERT. ON EACH BATCH.

29
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

FOR MINERAL AGGREGATE (SECTION

403): GRADATION, DECANTATION, %
CRUSHED PARTICLES, & %
DELETERIOUS:

ONE PER 500 TONS (400 CU.YD.) [450 t

(310 cu m)] MATERIALS MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL 611
FOR AGGREGATE (COARSE) FOR R.E. APPROVES ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
CONCRETE (SECTION 802):
GRAD., DECANT. & FINENESS MOD.
(FM)
ONE PER 500 CU. YDS. [400 cu m]
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
SAMPLING AND TESTING
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE
206, 307, QPL1
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS
GROUND GRANULATED BLAST FURNACE SLAG (GGBFS) 308, 309,
501, 503, RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER
802 SEE QPL FOR INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS.

701, 712,
GROUND ROD R.E. CERT. 2
714, 715

GUARD CABLE 618 QPL1

APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.

GUARD CABLE, ACCESSORIES 618 ONE OF EACH ACCESSORY PER
ALSO SEE REQS FOR DELINEATORS
PROJECT

GUARD CABLE, STEEL POST 618 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV

ONE SAMPLE (30 CORES) PER 1,000

GUARD CABLE, WOODEN POST 618 APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
POSTS OR ONE PER TREATMENT
CHARGE (TREATMENT BATCH)

MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. OF COMPLIANCE QPL1

GUARDRAIL 617, 639
NOTE: SEE QPL FOR GALV. COAT. REPAIR

QPL1

PRETESTED BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS WILL BE CERTIFIED BY

SUPPLIER BY REFERENCE TO MAT'LS. DIV. LAB TEST NUMBER.
617, 631,
GUARDRAIL, HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS.
639, 802 ONE PER SIZE PER PROJECT
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST SAMPLES TESTED AND APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
(IF NOT PRETESTED)
R.E. VERIFIES MARKINGS AND RECORDS IN DWR.

ONE SAMPLE (20 CORES) PER 1,000

GUARDRAIL, WOODEN POST 617, 639 APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
POSTS OR ONE PER TREATMENT
CHARGE (TREATMENT BATCH)

MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. OF COMPLIANCE QPL1

GUARDRAIL, STEEL POST 617, 639
RE RETAIN DELIVERY TICKETS

RE PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. QPL1
GUARDRAIL, TERMINAL ANCHOR POST 617, 639 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
R.E. RETAINS DELIVERY TICKETS . SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
CONCRETE

30
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
MFR. CERTIFICATION THAT TERMINAL MEETS
CONTRACTOR PROVIDES MANUFACTURER DETAILS AND INSTALLATION
GUARDRAIL, TERMINAL(TYPE 2) 617, 639 NCHRP REPORT 350 OR MASH FOR TL-3 TERMINAL
MANUALS

HAND RAILING
633 MFR. CERT. TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
WELDER CERTIFICATION REQUIRED.

FLEXIBLE PAD: SEE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE CONCRETE HOT MIX
MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. THAT MEETS NCHRP-350
IMPACT ATTEN. BARRIER 731 SAMPLING AND TESTING RIGID PAD: SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
OR MASH FOR TL-3 CRASH CUSHIONS

609, 610,
IRON CASTINGS (AASHTO M105, CLASS 35B) QPL1
807

505, 605,
QPL1
JOINT FILLER, PREF. ASPH, AASHTO M 213 632, 633,
634

501, 503,
CUTBACK-1 QT. [ONE L] METAL CAN QPL1
JOINT FILLER TYPE 1, MC-250 OR SS-1 WITH SAWDUST 504, 509,
EMULSION - 1 GAL. [4 L.] PL. JUG UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING.
512

501, 504,
JOINT FILLER TYPE 2
617, 631, QPL1
AASHTO M 153, TYPE I (SPONGE RUBBER)
802

JOINT FILLER 501, 503,

BACKER ROD (ASTM D5249 TYPE 1, FOR TYPES 504, 509, QPL1
3, 4 & 5; 511, 634,
(ASTM D5249 TYPE 2, FOR TYPES 3 & 4) 802

JOINT SEALER, CURB AND GUTTER 634 QPL1

JOINT SEALER, TYPES 3 THROUGH 6

501, 503,
(TYPE 3 SILICONE [ASTM D 5893] (PRIMERLESS), TYPE 4
504, 509, QPL1
SILICONE [ASTM D 5893] [REQUIRES PRIMER],
511, 634,
TYPE 5 HOT POUR [AASHTO M 282],
802
TYPE 6 TWO-COMPONENT COLD POUR [ASTM D 1850])

JOINT SEALER, TYPE 7

ASTM D6690, TYPE 1 501, 503,
QPL1
504, 512,
634, 802

31
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

LIME, AGRICULTURAL 620, 622 pH SOIL SAMPLE REQUIRED 5 LBS. R.E . CERT. 2 MATERIALS DIVISION PROVIDES LIME REQUIREMENT
[2.3 kg] OF SOIL
QPL1
LIME, HYDRATED & QUICK (PEBBLE)
301, 418 ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS CERTIFIED SUPPLIER: SAMPLE AS REQUESTED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT

AT LEAST 30 DAYS PRIOR TO
BEGINNING OF LIME TREATMENT,
SUBMIT 50 LBS [25 kg] OF EACH
DIFFERENT SOIL & 10 LBS [4.5 kg] OF
LIME TO BE USED ON PROJECT.

CONTRACTOR MAXIMUM MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE DESIGN.

LABORATORY DENSITY
DETERMINATION: ONE FOR EACH R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
SOIL TYPE WITH A MINIMUM OF ONE ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
PER JOB.
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 301
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OF DENSITY, MOISTURE CONTENT
&THICKNESS: ONE FOR EACH 12,000
SQ.YD. [10,000 sq m] (THICKNESS – FOR LIME SEE PORTLAND CEMENT
QUALITY CONTROL)

R.E. VERIFICATION TESTING OF

DENSITY , MOISTURE CONTENT &
THICKNESS: ONE FOR EACH 48,000
SQ. YDS.[40,000 sq. m]
LINSEED OIL
AASHTO M 233 (ASTM D 260) 803 QPL1

APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.

LUMBER, TREATED ONE SAMPLE OF 30 CORES PER 1,000
817
PIECES
CHECK MAT'LS. DIV. FOR POSSIBLE PRETEST
.2
MAILBOX (INCL. POST & HARDWARE) 637 R.E . CERT QPL1 (Alternate Supports)

MANHOLE STEPS 609, 610, QPL1

640

MECHANICAL REBAR SPLICES 503, 804 QPL1

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH WALLS (MSE WALLS)

SPECIAL
(INCLUDES RETAINING WALLS AND MODULAR BLOCK QPL1
PROVISION
WALLS)
309 500,
605, 606,
609, 610,
MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND
613-615, QPL1
AASHTO M 148, TYPE 1-D OR TYPE 2
617, 631-
634, 802,
822

MINERAL AGGR. IN ASPHALT SURF. TREATMENT SUBMIT TO MAT'LS. DIV. FOR MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR
CLASSES 1 THRU 5 TESTING: 50 LBS. [25 kg] TRANSFER.
IF LOOSE UNIT WEIGHT IS DESIRED.
402, 403, R.E. DETERMINES RATE OF APPLICATION
611 ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF
GRADATION, DECANTATION, % QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
CRUSHED PARTICLES, &%
DELETERIOUS: ONE PER 500 TONS R.E. APPROVES FIELD TEST REPORTS
(400 CU.YD.) [450 t (310 cu m)]

32
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
MINERAL FILLER 406,
SOURCES ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN
AASHTO M 17 407,409,
411, 418

MULCH CONTROL NETTING 621 R.E . CERT. 3

NOTE: R.E. VERIFIES WEIGHT AND SIZE

.3 SEE TACKIFIER IF APPLICABLE

MULCH COVER 620, 621, R.E . CERT
FOR WATER REQUIREMENTS SEE WATER.
622
NEOPRENE PADS 807 SEE BRIDGE BEARINGS, ELASTOMERIC PADS

NEOPRENE TROUGH 807 MFR. CERT. TESTS APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.

MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE MIX DESIGN. AT LEAST 10 WORKING

SUBMIT 50 LBS. [25 kg] OF EACH DAYS PRIOR TO THE BEGINNING OF FIELD PRODUCTION,
AGGREGATE TO BE USED IN THE
BLEND ALONG WITH AVERAGE MIX WILL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AT START OF PRODUCTION
STOCKPILE GRADATIONS. IF ONLY OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 90 CALENDAR DAYS.
ONE MATERIAL TO BE USED,SUBMIT
75LBS. [40 kg]. AGGR MUST HAVE A CURRENT ABRASION AND SOUNDNESS SEE QPL OR
CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OPEN GRADED ASPHALT BASE COURSE 417 OF ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT AND
GRADATION: ONE PER SUBLOT OF R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
750 TONS [750 t] ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING, OF
ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT AND (NO DENSITY REQ.) MATERIAL CONSOLIDATED TO RE's SATISFACTION.)
GRADATION: ONE PER LOT OF 3000
TONS [3000 t] MINIMUM OF ONE PER ARDOT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTS FOR ACCEPT. AND ADJUSTMENT ON
JOB, MATERIAL USED TO REPLACE UNACCEPTABLE MATERIAL REMOVED BY
THE CONTRACTOR.

CONTRACTOR PREPARES MIX DESIGN

RE APPROVES MIX DESIGN
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OPEN GRADED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE BASE 310 OF GRADATION: ONE PER LOT OF (NO DENSITY REQ. MATERIAL CONSOLIDATED TO RE's SATISFACTION.)
2500 Sq Yds. (2000 Sq M.)
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

PAINT, MISCELLANEOUS 609, 638, R.E. CHECKS DRY FILM THICKNESS (MINIMUM OF 0.125 mm [5 MILS])
(ALUMINUM EPOXY PAINT SYSTEM) 712, 714, QPL1
715, 811

PAINT, STEEL STRUCTURES 807, 820 QPL1

PRIMER - TIE COAT – URETHANE

CONTRACTOR CERT OF CONSTRUCTION AND

604,
INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS.
PAINT, REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKING QPL1
MFR. CERT. EACH LOT FOR PAINT. BEADS ON QPL ALSO
718
MFR. CERT. BEADS.. CERT. ON BEADS NOT REQ. IF USING FUSED PREFORMED MARKINGS.

PAPER, INSULATING, WATERPROOFING R.E . CERT. 2

815
IF ASPHALT, SEE ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT MIX
IF CONCRETE, SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT REPAIR OVER CULVERTS R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE FOR STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC
615
SAMPLING AND TESTING
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN SEE SIGNS (STANDARD) FOR ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSIDIARY SIGNS
707
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE
ENGINEER APPROVAL – TRAFFIC

33
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
604, CONTRACTOR CERT FOR CONSTRUCTION AND QPL1
PERMANENT PVT.MRK.TAPE
719, 720 INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS
MFR. CERT. TESTS APPROVED BY MATERIALS DIVISION
PERMANENT STEEL DECK FORMS 802
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
SEE WELDING MATERIALS

PILING, PRECAST CONCRETE 805

SEE PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONC. PRODUCTS, STRUCTURAL

QPL (NOT NOTED IN SITEMANAGER)

APPROVED BY MATERIALS DIVISION

MFR. CERT. TEST SEE WELDING MATERIALS

PILING & ACCESSORIES, STEEL 805, 811
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
FOR CONCRETE IN STEEL SHELL PILES SEE PORTLAND CEMENT
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.

FOR PAINTING SEE PAINT MISCELLANEOUS.

QPL1
PILING, “H”, STEEL POINTS 805 WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
SEE WELDING MATERIALS
QPL (NOT NOTED IN SITEMANAGER)
MFR. CERT. TEST APPROVED BY MATERIALS DIVISION
PILING, “SHELL”, STEEL TIPS 805, 811
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
SEE WELDING MATERIALS
ONE SAMPLE OF 30 CORES PER 1000
PILING, TREATED TIMBER 818 PILES OR ONE PER TREATMENT APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
CHARGE (TREATMENT BATCH) CHECK MAT'LS. DIV. FOR PRETESTED PILING.

PIPE JOINT SEAL GASKET 606, 607, QPL1

609, 610
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
QPL1(FILTER FABRIC & PIPE)
PIPE UNDERDRAIN 611 SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR
SEE MINERAL AGGREGATE OR AGGREGATE FOR PCC - STRUCTURES.
AGGREGATES.
PITCH, AASHTO M 118 (ASTM D450-96) 817, 818 MFR. CERTIFIED TESTS APPROVED BY MATERIALS DIVISION
QPL1
NOTE: AASHTO M 294 PIPE MUST BE TYPE 'S' WHICH HAS A SMOOTH
MFR. CERT. OF DELIVERY
INNER LINING AND CORRUG. (ANNULAR) OUTER SURFACE.
PLASTIC PIPE 606, 621
USED PIPE FOR SLOPE DRAINS CERTIFIED
AASHTO M 294 OR M 304 SHOULD BE PRINTED ON PIPE. (TYPE 'C' CAN BE
BY RE 2
USED FOR SLOPE DRAINS - SECT. 621)

POLYETHYLENE SELF ADHERING WATERPROOF. 815 QPL1

309, 500,
605, 606,
609, 610,
POLYETHYLENE SHEETING 613-615, R.E . CERT. 3 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.10 mm (4 MILS)
617, 631-
634, 732,
802, 822

309, 500,
605, 606,
POLYETHYLENE-BURLAP MAT PCC CURING 609, 610,
AASHTO M 171 613-615, R.E . CERT. 3
617, 631-
634, 732,
802, 822

POLYURETHANE, COLD APPLIED WATERPROOF'G 815 QPL1

34
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
SEE PC CONCRETE PAVEMENT

(1) PROPORTIONS CAN COMPLY WITH SECTION 501 FOR PAVING

CONCRETE OR SECTION 802 FOR CLASS A OR CLASS S CONCRETE.
(2)COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH WILL BE DETERMINED BY CYLINDERS.
(3) A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2100 PSI (15 MPa) MUST BE
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) BASE 309
OBTAINED BEFORE OPENING TO TRAF.
(4) THICKNESS WILL BE DETERMINED BY SOUNDING AFTER FRESH
CONCRETE HAS BEEN STRUCK OFF.

SINCE SEVERAL CLASSES OF CONCRETE CAN BE UTILIZED FOR PCC

BASE, AIR CONTENT MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE.
QPL1 (CURING COMPOUND & JOINT FILLER)
R.E .PERFORMS CONCRETE
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY 505
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING & TESTING .R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

SEE AGGREGATES PCC - STRUCTURES FOR INFORMATION ON

GRADATION TESTING.

CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGNS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE R.E. FOR

REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO PRODUCTION
504, 505, CONTR. ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF
605, 606, AIR CONTENT, SLUMP AND THE DEPARTMENT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTING REQUIRED FOR WATER,
609-611, COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH: ONE SET CEMENT, FLY ASH, SOUNDNESS AND LOS ANGELES WEAR
613-615, PER SUBLOT OF 100 CU. YDS. OFAGGREGATES. SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES 617, 619, [75 cu m] FOR EACH CLASS WITH A SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
(INCLUDES CLASSES A, B, M, S, S(AE), SEAL AND 631-633, MINIMUM OF ONE SET PER BRIDGE
OVERLAY CONCRETE WITH AND WITHOUT FLY ASH. 701, 702, STRUCTURE. CONTRACTOR CASTS TWO(2) CONCRETE CYLINDERS PER SET OF TESTS;
ALSO INCLUDES SECTION 501 CONCRETE WHEN NOT 712, 714, ALSO, FOR CLASS S(AE), A MINIMUM AVERAGE IS USED FOR ACCEPTANCE VALUE
USED FOR PAVEMENT.) 715, 724, OF ONE SET PER DECK POUR.
730-732, R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
734, 802, ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING: AIR ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
805, 816, CONTENT, SLUMP AND COMPRESSIVE
822 STRENGTH; ONE SET PER LOT OF 400 ADD'L CYLINDERS MAY BE CAST BY CONTR.FOR SCHEDULING PURPOSES
CU. YDS. [300 cu m] . TO DETERMINE TIME FOR STRIPPING FORMS OR LOADING THE
STRUCTURE.
TESTING OF GRADATION OF AGGREGATES FOR CLASS M CONCRETE IS
NOT REQUIRED.
QPL 1 (CURING COMPOUND)
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) PAVEMENT, 501, 503, CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING 802.06 IF APPLICABLE.
HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONCRETE PAVEMENT, 504, 507, FOR AIR CONTENT, SLUMP AND
CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT, 511, 613, CORE RESULTS (COMPRESSIVE CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGN WITH CERTIFICATION OF LOW ALKALI CEMENT
HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED 734 STRENGTH AND THICKNESS): ONE OR POTENTIAL ALKALI REACTIVITY TEST AND JOB MIX FORMULA
CONCRETE PAVEMENT, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PER SUBLOT OF 1000 CU. YDS. SUBMITTED TO RE MINIMUM 15 WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO USE.
PAVEMENT PATCHING, PORTLAND CEMENT CEMENT [750 cu m]( CYLINDERS AND WET
CONCRETE SHOULDER (ADD-ON) APPROACH SLAB, THICKNESS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONTRACTOR TO SPLIT QUALITY CONTROL AGGREGATE SAMPLES WITH
APPROACH GUTTERS CONCRETE PAVEMENT PATCHING.) RE FOR VERIFICATION TESTING

ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR RE APPROVES MIX DESIGN

CORE RESULTS: ONE PER LOT OF
4000 CU. YDS. [3000 cu m] SEE AGGREGATES ( PCCP) FOR INFORMATION ON GRADATION TESTING.

OPENING PAVEMENT TO TRAFFIC R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
AFTER 7 DAYS (24 HRS IF HIGH EARLY ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
STRENGTH CONCRETE PAVEMENT
SPECIFIED) AND CONTRACTOR TEST AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, ADDITIONAL TESTING MAY BE PERFORMED
RESULTS OF REPRESENTATIVE TEST FOR CONFIRMING PRICE REDUCTIONS OR REJECTION DUE TO
CYLINDERS ACHIEVING MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS.
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 3000
PSI (21.0 MPa) ARDOT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTS FOR ACCEPT.AND ADJUSTMENT ON
MATERIAL USED TO REPLACE UNACCEPTABLE MATERIAL REMOVED BY
THE CONTRACTOR.

QPL 1 (CURING COMPOUND)

35
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
PORTLAND CEMENT, TYPES I, II & III
FLYASH QPL1
GROUND GRANULATED BLAST FURNACE
206, 300,
SLAG CERTIFIED SUPPLIER: SAMPLE AS REQUESTED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
418, 500, ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER
PORTLAND-POZZOLAN CEMENT, TYPE IP(##)
600, 800
POZZOLAN-MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT, UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT
R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS
TYPE IS(##)
SLAG-MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT
PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER 604 CONTRACTOR CERT.

606 SEE REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE

PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MISC.

(INCLUDE FLARED END SECTIONS, CURTAIN QPL1
WALLS, CATTLE PASSES, UNDERDRAIN 606, 609, MFR. CERTS. OF DELIVERY
INDIVIDUAL PCS. MAY BE STAMPED BY ARDOT INSPECTORS
OUTLET PROTECTORS, DI's, JUNCTION BOXES, 611, 614
CONCRETE SPILLWAY)

APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV INDIVIDUAL PCS STAMPED BY A.H.T.D. OR

AGENT
PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONC. PRODUCTS, MFR. CERTS.OF DELIVERY INSPECTED AT MFR. BY ARDOT, OTHER STATE DOT OR ARDOT
802, 805
STRUCTURAL CONTRACTED
COMMERCIAL FIRM
QPL1
SEE PLANS FOR GROUT REQUIREMENTS.

QPL1
INDIVIDUAL PCS. STAMPED WITH ARKANSAS CONCRETE PIPE
ASSOCIATION (ARCPA) OR AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION
(ACPA) CERTIFIED SEAL (STAMP) WITH CAST DATE AND MANFACTURER'S
IDENTIFICATION.
MFR. CERTS.OF DELIVERY
PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE, BOX CULVERT 607 SEE PLANS FOR GROUT REQUIREMENTS.

SEE JOINT SEALER FOR REQUIREMENTS

SEE CURING COMPOUND REQUIREMENTS.

SEE ASPHALT WATERPROOFING REQUIREMENTS.

PREFORMED FABRIC PADS 802,807 SEE BRIDGE BEARING PADS, PREFORMED FABRIC

QPL1

PREFORMED JOINT SEAL, AASHTO M 297 809 BRIDGE DIV. APPROVES DIMENSION DRAWINGS

LUBRICANT-ADHESIVE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN QPL1

PREFORMED LOOP DETECTOR 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.

PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT STEEL, ONE SAMPLE 12 FT.[4 m ]PER HEAT

802, 805 NUMBER PER SHIPMENT (PER 7 COILS MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
SEVEN WIRE STRAND
MAX.)
PRETIMED CONTROLLER 702 SAME REQ. AS ACTUATED CONTROLLER

PROCESS LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 301 SEE LIME TREATED SUBGRADE

PROTECTIVE SURFACE TREATMENT, QPL1

803
CLASS 1,2 & 3
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS & ADHESIVES 604, 721 CONTRACTOR CERT. OF CONSTRUCTION AND QPL1
INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS

36
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
200 LBS [90 kg] FOR MAXIMUM
DENSITY TEST
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE SAME REQUIREMENTS AS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR COMPACTION
TESTING OF DENSITY AND EXCEPT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 95% OF MAXIMUM LABORATORY
MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER DENSITY.
RECONSTRUCTED BASE COURSE 305 1000 TONS [1000 t] SOUNDINGS ARE NOT REQUIRED
R.E. PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING OF DENSITY AND R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
4000 TONS [4000 t] / CU. YDS
(cu m)

QPL1
INDIVIDUAL PCS. STAMPED WITH ARKANSAS CONCRETE PIPE
MFR. CERTS.OF DELIVERY ASSOCIATION (ARCPA) OR AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION
REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 606, 621
(ACPA) CERTIFIED SEAL (STAMP) WITH CAST DATE AND MANFACTURER'S
IDENTIFICATION. SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL FOR ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS

606, 607, QPL1

REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE GASKET
609, 610

501-504,
605-607,
609-611
QPL1
613, 614,
NOTE: IF SUPPLIER NOT ON QPL, CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR
617, 631,
REINFORCING STEEL (BARS) CERTS.OF DELIVERY ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
712, 714,
715, 724,
ALSO SEE EPOXY REINFORCING STEEL
730, 732,
802, 804,
805, 822

502, 503,
504, 507,
615, 701, ONE FULL WIDTH BY 5 FT. [1.5 m] PER MFR. CERTIFIED TEST WITH MILL ANALYSIS APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC
702, 711, 20,000 LBS[9000 kg] REPORT CHECK WITH MAT'LS. DIV. FOR POSSIBLE PRETEST & TAG
732, 804,
816, 822

QPL1
RELEASE AGENT (NON-PETROLEUM) 410

SAME REQUIREMENTS AS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR COMPACTION,

REMOVING & REPLACING BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
209
SURFACING ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE AGGREGATE GRADATION AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 822.
REPAIR AND OVERLAY OF CONCRETE BRIDGE DECKS 822 SAMPLING AND TESTING DENSITY TESTING ACCORDING TO AASHTO T 271.
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
501, 507,
RESIN ANCHORING SYSTEMS QPL1
804
SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES, REINFORCING
STEEL (BARS) AND REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC.
RIPRAP, CONCRETE
816
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

37
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
QPL1
RIPRAP, DUMPED (FOUNDATION PROTECTION RIPRAP, SEE CURRENT QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
621, 816 R.E . CERT. 2
DUMPED RIPRAP – GROUTED) AND APPROVAL.

QPL1
R.E . CERT. 2 MAT'L MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
ROCK BUTTRESS 630 SEE CURRENT QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
AND APPROVAL

ROCK EXCAVATION 210 SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

SAFETY END SECTIONS R.E. RETAINS CERTS.OF COMPLIANCE QPL1

606

SAND BAGS 621 SEE DITCH CHECKS.

MATERIALS PERFORMS MAXIMUM LABORATORY DENSITY
MAXIMUM LABORATORY DENSITY
SUBMIT 150 LBS [70 kg] SAMPLE SIZE
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
SCARIFYING AND RECOMPACTING SHOULDERS 216 CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
FOR DENSITY& % MOISTURE: ONE
FOR EACH 6000 SQ.YD. [5000 sq m]

SEED (INCLUDING WILD FLOWERS) 620-623 R.E. CERT. 4 MUST MEET ARKANSAS STATE PLANT BOARD RULES AND REGULATIONS

FOR MAXIMUM DENSITY: IF PLUS NO. MAXIMUM LABORATORY DENSITY DETERMINED BY ARDOT.
4 [4.75 mm] MATERIAL 11%-30%
302, (SUBMIT SAMPLE SIZEOF 150 LBS. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE FREE OF DELETERIOUS MATTER.
SELECTED MATERIAL 307,504 [70 kg])
IF PLUS NO. 4 [4.75 mm] MATERIAL R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
OVER 30% (SUBMIT SAMPLE SIZE OF ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
200 LBS. [90 kg])

SHAPING ROADWAY SECTION 213 SAME REQUIREMENTS AS R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
COMPACTED EMBANKMENT ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

SHEET COPPER 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

SHEET ZINC ASTM B 69 TYPE II 807, 818 MFR. CERTIFIED APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

SIGNS, CONSTRUCTION 604 SEE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES IN CONST. ZONES

QPL1 (SHEETING)
618, 706, . SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVED BY ENGINEER
SIGNS, STANDARD 707, 723,
(INCLUDES GUIDE SIGNS & DELINEATORS) 725, ALUMINUM BLANKS AND ACCESSORIES: MFR SEE PARTICULAR TYPE OF SUPPORT (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ACCEPTANCE
726,728 CERTIFIED TEST CRITERIA

MFR CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS . DIV.

SIGN SUPPORT, BREAKAWAY FOR FOUNDATION, SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE FOR STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING STEEL(BARS)
730 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
CONCRETE APPROVED BY MAT'LS . DIV.

SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVED BY ENGINEER.

SIGN STRUCTURES: OVRHD, BRIDGE MOUNTED, FOR FOUNDATION, SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR
CANTILEVER 724 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST FOR MATERIALS STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING STEEL(BARS)
MATERIALS APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF COMMERCIAL ALTERNATIVES WITH DESIGN CALCULATIONS AND
CONTRACTOR CERT. WELDING & FABRICATION.
CONCRETE CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN BY PROFESSIONAL ENGR. APPROVED BY
ENGINEER
SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVED BY ENGINEER BEFORE FABRICATION .

38
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
SILICONE, ASPHALT ADDITIVE 409 QPL1
CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGNS SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO MAT'LS. DIV. FOR
REVIEW AT LEAST FIVE (5) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO USE. IF
AGGREGATE SOURCES NOT ON QPL, ALLOW AT LEAST 10 WORKING
DAYS FOR SAMPLING AND TESTING BEFORE REVIEW.
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING ALSO, PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK, EMULSION SUPPLIER SHALL
ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT AND FURNISH MATERIALS DIVISION SAMPLES OF BASE ASPHALT AND
GRADATION: ONE PER SUBLOT OF POLYMER USED IN EMULSION.
30,000 SQ. YDS. [25,000 sq m]
SLURRY SEAL 418 NOTE: AGGR MUST HAVE A CURRENT ABRASION AND SOUNDNESS. SEE
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE/VERIFICATION QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
TESTING ONE PER LOT OF 120,000 SQ. LIMESTONE MINERAL AGGREGATE NOT ALLOWED.
YDS. [100,000 sq m]
ASPHALT EMULSION: SAME REQS. AS ASPHALT PENETRATING PRIME

R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL

ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
SOD MULCH R.E . CERT. 2
622 ALSO SEE FERTILIZER; LIME, AGRICULTURAL; TACKIFIER, MULCH.
.2
SODDING, SOLID R.E . CERT
624 ALSO SEE FERTILIZER

ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN.

SOFTENING AGENT FOR RECYCLED ASPHALT PAV. 416 MFR. CERTIFIED
SAMPLED BY OR AT REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
SEE REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT TREATED BASE CRS. OR SELECTED
SOIL AGGREGATE
MATERIAL AS APPROPRIATE
STAPLES, EROSION MATTING 626 R.E . CERT. 3
STEEL MUST BE GALVANIZED.
APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
SEE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.
SEE REINFORCING STEEL (BARS)
STEEL GRATE ASSEMBLY 613 R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT.
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
CONCRETE.
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND FIELD TEST REPORTS.
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT. APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
STEEL PIPE SIPHON 612 SEE WELDING MATERIALS.
CERT. WELDER REQUIRED
.SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

STEEL PRODUCTS (NOT LISTED ELSEWHERE) 500, 600, MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT. APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
700, 800
STONE BACKFILL(INCLUDES MAT'L FOR ROCK DITCH
207, 621 R.E . CERT. 2 SEE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE.
CHECKS AND ROCK FILTER)
APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT.
STRUCTURAL PLATE PIPE AND ARCHES IF ASPHALT COATING SPECIFIED, FIELD INSPECT COATING -0.05 IN [1.3
608
(INCLUDES BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS.) mm] MINIMUM AT CORRUGATION CRESTS (IN & OUTSIDE). SEE SAMPLING
R.E . CERT. 2 (ASPHALT COATING THICKNESS)
METHOD 65.
SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL.
QPL1 (FABRICATOR)
APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MATERIALS APPROVED FABRICATION LETTER REQUIRED.
NOTE: INSPECTED AT MFR. BY ARDOT, OTHER STATE DOT OR ARDOT
CONTRACTED COMMERCIAL FIRM
STRUCTURAL STEEL, OTHER
500, 600,
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT. APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
700, 800

39
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS 807 QPL1
MFR. CERT. SEE STRUCTURAL STEEL.
CONTRACTOR MAXIMUM
LABORATORY DENSITY ONE FOR
EACH SOIL TYPE WITH A MINIMUM OF
ONE PER JOB

CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING

OF DENSITY& % MOISTURE: ONE FOR
EACH 12,000 SQ.YD. [10,000 sq m]
WITH A MINIMUM OF ONE PER LAYER
SUBGRADE, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, AND 212, 214, R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
TRENCHING AND SHOULDER PREPARATION 215 RE WILL PERFORM VERIFICATION ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TESTING FOR MAXIMUM
LABORATORY DENSITY, ONE FOR
EACH SOIL TYPE WITH A MINIMUM OF
ONE PER JOB.

R.E. WILL PERFORM VERIFICATION

TESTING OF DENSITY AND %
MOISTURE: ONE FOR EACH 48,000
SQ. YDS. [40,000 sq m]

620, 621, QPL1

TACKIFIER, MULCH
622 ASPHALT: QPL SOURCE

TACTILE PANELS 641 QPL1

CONTRACTOR CERT.-BRIDGE
TEMPORARY STRUCTURE, MATERIALS 603
R.E . CERT. 3 -- CULVERTS

TEXTURED COATING FINISH 802 QPL1

QPL1
BEADS ON QPL
THERMOPLASTIC PVT. MRK. 718, 719
MARKINGS PLACED ON CONCRETE REQUIRE PAINT PAVEMENT MARKINGS
AS A PRIMER OR A PRIMER RECOMMENDED BY THERMOPLASTIC
MANUFACTURER.

TOPSOIL 628 R.E . CERT. 2

APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

501-503, MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
TIE BARS
507 CONTRACTOR CERT. ON EPOXY COATING. RESIN ANCHORING SYSTEM FOR SECURING BARS LISTED ON QPL

ONE SAMPLE OF 30 CORES PER 1000 APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

TIMBERS, BRIDGE, TREATED 817 CHECK WITH MAT’LS DIV. FOR PRETEST
PCS.

TIMBERS BRIDGE, HARDWARE 817 CONTRACTOR CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
(BARS,PLATES,STR. SHAPES,CASTINGS, ETC.)
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES IN CONST. ZONES,
CONTRACTOR CERTIFIED (INCLUDES SIGNS,
VERT. PANELS, DRUMS, PRECAST CONCRETE 604 CONTRACTOR CERT.
BARRIERS, BARRICADES, CONSTR. PVMT. MRKS.,
INTERIM PVMT. MRKS., AND CONES
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES IN CONST. ZONES
ADV. WARNING ARROW PANEL & PORTABLE 604 R.E . CERT. 2 R.E. DETERMINES MUTCD COMPLIANCE
CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN

40
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
FOR FOUNDATION, SEE PORTLAND
CEMENT CONCRETE
FOR STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING CERTIFICATION BY MANUFACTURER OR DESIGN PLANS CERTIFIED BY P.E. SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND RECORD
TRAFFIC SIGNAL MAST ARM AND POLE, PEDESTAL POLE 712, '714, STEEL (BARS) SUPPLIER THAT ITEM FABRICATED COMPLY WITH
AND SPAN WIRE SUPPORT POLE WITH FOUNDATION. 715 DESIGN AND MATERIALS COMPLY WITH SEE QPL FOR MAT'LS USED FOR FIELD REPAIR OF ALUMINUM PAINT
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE SPECIFICATIONS.
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
CONCRETE
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, FEEDER WIRE 704 ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT 709 R.E. CERT. 2

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC

TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD & PEDESTRIAN HEAD 706, 707
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR SEE SIGNS (STANDARD) FOR ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSIDIARY SIGNS
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, LOOP SEALANT & BACKER ROD 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL QPL1
BY ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, LOOP WIRE 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
705 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, LOOP WIRE IN DUCT
BY ENGINEER

TRAFFIC SIGNALNON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC OR PE) 710 R.E. CERT.2

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, SIGNAL CABLE 708 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, SPAN WIRE 713 QPL1

713 CONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER CERTIFIED

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, SPAN WIRE ACCESSORIES
CONTRACTOR CERTIFIES:CLASS, SIZE, &
TREATED WOOD POLES 716
TREATMENT
(Also - ELEC.SERV. POLES)

TRENCHING AND SHOULDER PREPARATION 215 SEE SUBGRADE.

618, 728,
U CHANNEL, SIGN POST MFR. CERTIFIED MILL TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
729

UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION – STRUCTURES 801 SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

UNDERDRAIN, OUTLET PROTECTORS 611 SEE PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MISCELLANEOUS

UNDERDRAIN, PIPE LATERALS 611 R.E. CERT. 2

ASTM D1785 FOR SCHEDULE 40 PIPE
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
VEHICLE DETECTOR 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.

VIDEO DETECTOR MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE ASSISTS IN SETUP AND

733 CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN PROGRAMMING
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC

41
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2003

2003 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
206, 301, APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
307, 308,
309, 400, ONE 1 GAL. [4 LITERS] SAMPLE PER NO SAMPLE IF PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY IS SOURCE.
WATER
500, 600, PROJECT

800 RE APPROVES IRRIGATION QUALITY WATER FOR SEEDING

WATERSTOP, PVC AND RUBBER 802 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

WELDED SPLICES 503, 804 WELDER CERT. REQUIRED. APPROVED BY ENGINEER

MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATOR'S CERT. APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV. MAY BE GALVANIZED OR PAINTED. SEE
WELDED STEEL GRATES AND FRAMES 609 PAINT, MISCELLANEOUS IF FIELD PAINTED.
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.

502, 503,
504, 507,
615, 701,
WELDED WIRE FABRIC SEE REINF. STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC
702, 711,
732, 804,
816, 822
609, 610,
WELDING MATERIALS 612, 617, QPL1
802, 807,
811

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

WHEELCHAIR RAMPS 641 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
CONCRETE. SEE ALSO TACTILE PANELS

QPL1 (MISC. IRON & STEEL, METAL CULVERT PIPE)

YARD DRAINS 609 SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL.
SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
GENERAL NOTES:

 THE RESIDENT ENGINEER AND CONTRACTOR CAN NOT USE SPLIT SAMPLES FOR ACCEPTANCE. ACCEPTANCE SAMPLE MUST BE SEPARATE SAMPLES.

 IF A MATERIAL IS NOT LISTED ON THIS GUIDE SCHEDULE, SUCH AS JOB SPECIAL PROVISION ITEMS, CONTACT THE MATERIALS DIVISION TO DETERMINE A SAMPLING/TESTING RATE.

 IF THERE IS A QUESTION CONCERNING THE QUALITY OF A MATERIAL/PRODUCT OR WHETHER A MATERIAL/PRODUCT MEETS SPECIFICATIONS, EVEN IF PROPERLY CERTIFIED OR FROM A QPL,
CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. ABOUT TESTING OF THE MATERIAL/PRODUCT. SAMPLES MAY BE OBTAINED AT REQUEST OF MATERIAL’S DIVISION.

 NO SAMPLES ARE REQUIRED ON MATERIALS THAT ARE PRETESTED/INSPECTED BY MAT'LS. DIV. UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS SCHEDULE. PRETESTED MATERIAL WILL NORMALLY HAVE AN ARDOT SEAL,
TAG, OR MARKING. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE VALIDITY OR SOURCE OF THESE IDENTIFIERS, CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV.

 ALL STEEL ITEMS ARE SUBJECT TO RESTRICTIONS AS EXPLAINED IN SECTION 106.01 OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.

 FAILING TEST REPORTS ORIGINATING FROM THE MAT'LS. DIV. WILL BE RETURNED TO THE RESIDENT ENGINEER WITHOUT COMMENT AS TO THE FINAL DISPOSITION AND ACCEPTABILITY OF A MATERIAL
UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ACCEPTED BY THE CONSTRUCTION, ROADWAY DESIGN, AND/OR BRIDGE DESIGN DIVISIONS. THE RESIDENT ENGINEER SHOULD MAKE APPROPRIATE COMMENTS AND TRANSMIT THROUGH
THE DISTRICT ENGINEER TO THE CONSTRUCTION DIVISION. A COPY OF THE TEST REPORT SHOULD ACCOMPANY THESE COMMENTS. THE STATE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER WILL DETERMINE THE FINAL
DISPOSITION OF THE MATERIAL AFTER CONSIDERING THE COMMENTS OF THE RESIDENT ENGINEER AND THE DISTRICT ENGINEER, AND AFTER CONSULTING WITH THE MATERIALS ENGINEER.

 FOR FAILING FIELD TEST REPORTS OR OTHER MATERIAL IRREGULARITIES, REFER TO R. E. MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS.
NOTES:
1. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M196 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER REQUIREMENTS
2. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M170 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATREIALS MODULE JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER
REQUIREMENTS.
3. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M170 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS NO ACTION REQUIRED.
4. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M40 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER.
5. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M41 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER.

42
November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING

OF
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

Standard Specifications for HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION, Edition 2014

43
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

ACRYL-BUTA-STYR(ABS) PIPE
ASTM D2680 611 QPL 1

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

ACTUATED CONTROLLER 701 ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE.
QPL 1 AND /OR APPROVED BY ENGINEER. ALL ADMIXTURES USED IN A
ADMIXTURES, PCC 206, 309, MIX SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EACH OTHER AS ADVISED BY THE
(INCLUDES RETARDERS, AIR ENTRAINING AGENTS, 500, 600, MANUFACTURER.
ACCELERATORS, AND SUPERPLASTICIZERS) 700, 800

MATERIALS MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.

SEE QPL 1 OR CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
CONTR. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND APPROVAL
631, 632, OF GRAD., DECANT. & FINENESS
AGGREGATE: PC CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES 701, 702, MOD. (FM): IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE AMOUNT OF
(INCLUDES CLASSES A, B, S, S[AE], SEAL AND 711, 730, , ONE (FINE AND COARSE) PER SUBLOT DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES WILL BE TESTED. ALL FINE AGGREGATE SHALL
OVERLAY CONCRETE) 802, 816 OF 500 CU. YDS. [400 cu m] OF BE FREE OF INJURIOUS AMOUNT OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES.
822 CONCRETE.
Minimum 1 PER BRIDGE STRUCTURE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
QUALITY CONTROL FIELD TEST REPORTS.

CONTR. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

309, 501, OF GRAD., DECANT. & FINENESS
503, 507, MOD. (FM):
AGGREGATE: PC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 511 ONE (FINE AND COARSE) PER SUBLOT MATERIALS MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
(INCLUDES HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONCRETE OF 1000 CU. YDS. [750 cu m] OF
SEE QPL 1 OR CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
PAVEMENT, CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE CONCRETE.
AND APPROVAL
PAVEMENT, HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONTINUOUSLY
REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT, PCC BASE, PCCP ARDOT PERFORMS VERIFICATION
PATCHING AND PCC SHOULDER [ADD-ON]) TESTING FOR GRADATION. IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE AMOUNT OF
DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES WILL BE TESTED. ALL FINE AGGREGATE SHALL
BE FREE OF INJURIOUS AMOUNT OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES.

THE RATE OF VERIFICATION TESTING WILL BE 1 PER LOT OF 4000

CU. YDS. OF MIX

R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL

QUALITY CONTROL FIELD TEST REPORTS.

44
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
(1) 75 LBS [35 kg] FOR
GRADATION,PI, DUST RATIO, %
CRUSHED PARTICLES & %
DELETERIOUS

(2) 200 LBS [90 kg] FOR NUMBER MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR
(1) ABOVE AND MAXIMUM DENSITY TRANSFER. SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
TEST SAMPLING AND APPROVAL
QPL 1
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE %
TESTING OF GRADATION,PI, DUST DELETERIOUS OR % CRUSHED WILL BE TESTED.
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
209, 303, RATIO (CALCULATED), THICKNESS
(INCLUDES REMOVING AND REPLACING BASE (IF SPECIFIED), DENSITY AND
306, 310,
COURSE AND ASPHALT SURFACING) MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER
405, 504, R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
731, 816 1000 TONS [1000 t]
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

IF CRUSHED STONE, THE DEPARTMENT WILL FURNISH PI

INFORMATION.
R.E. PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING OF GRADATION, , DUST RE PERFORMS MOISTURE CHECK PER SEC. 109
RATIO (CALCULATED), THICKNESS
(IF SPECIFIED), DENSITY AND
MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER
4000 TONS [4000 t] / CU. YDS
(cu m)

AGGREGATE IN SLURRY SEAL 418 SEE SLURRY SEAL

ALUMINUM PRODUCTS 806 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MAT'LS DIV. APPROVES REPORT.

ALUMINUM COATED STEEL PRODUCTS 806 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MAT'LS DIV. APPROVES REPORT.

ALUMINUM IMPREGNATED ASPHALT PAINT 724 APPROVED BY ENGINEER. (CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION IF NEEDED)

ANCHOR BOLTS, BRIDGE 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST BRIDGE DIV. APPROVES REPORT.

ANCHOR BOLTS, BRIDGE 807 QPL 1

EPOXY AND NON-SHRINK GROUT
609, 610,
BRIDGE DIV. APPROVES REPORT.
613,631,
ANCHOR BOLTS, MISCELLANEOUS MFR. CERTIFIED TEST SAMPLED AT THE REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
724, 730

QPL 1

400, 504, ENTER BRAND NAME ON REPORT OF INSPECTION AT ASPHALT PLANT

ANTI-STRIP ADDITIVE, ASPHALT MIX (M389)
615, 731
NOTE: ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN

307, 308, QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209)(IN

ASPHALT, CUT-BACK 401,402, UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
403, 411, SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT (1 Qt.)
414, 415,, , NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING
731
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION

45
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209) )(IN
SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
307, 308,
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE
ASPHALT, EMULSIFIED 401, 402,
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT (1 Qt.) NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING
403
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION
ASPHALT, FIBER MODIFIED, WATERPROOF'G
813, 815 QPL 1
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION
ASPHALT, MOPPING, WATERPROOF'G 813, 815 QPL 1 RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION.
QPL 1 (INFORMATION DOCUMENTED ON FORM 19-208 AND 19-209) )(IN
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER: ONE SITEMANAGER REPORT IN DWR).
ASPHALT, TACK
401 SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT ( 1 Qt. for
Cutback ; 1 Gal. for Emulsions) NOTE: UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING

RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION

400, 504, QPL 1
ASPHALT BINDER 615, 731, NOTE: ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN
732
RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST FROM MATERIALS DIVISION
CONTRACTOR DEVELOPED MIX DESIGN SUBMITTED TO DMS FOR REVIEW
AND SUBMITTED TO MATERIALS ENGINEER. THE DEPARTMENT WILL
PERFORM VERIFICATION TESTING AS NEEDED.
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OF GRADATION AND ASPHALT
ASPHALT CONCRETE COLD MIX 411, 414 R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
CONTENT:
ONE PER LOT OF 750 TONS [ 750 t] ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

MIX WILL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AT START OF PRODUCTION

OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 120CALENDAR DAYS
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
TESTING:
WATER SENSITIVITY: ONCE DURING CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGNS SUBMITTED TO MATERIALS DIVISION FOR
FIRST THREE DAYS OF PRODUCTION REVIEW AT LEAST FIVE (5) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO USE. IF ASPHALT
OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF BINDER OR AGGREGATE SOURCES NOT ON QPL, ALLOW AT LEAST 10
MORE THAN 90 CALENDAR DAYS WORKING DAYS FOR SAMPLING AND TESTING BEFORE REVIEW.
AGGREGATE GRADATION: ONE PER
750 TONS [750 t].
MIX WILL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AT START OF PRODUCTION
400, 414, OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 120 CALENDAR DAYS.
ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT MIX CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE
415, 504,
615, 731 TESTING: ASPHALT BINDER
CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, VMA AND R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
DENSITY ONE PER SUBLOT OF 750 ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TONS [750 t]
ARDOT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTS FOR ACCEPT. AND ADJUSTMENT ON
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE / VERIFICATION MATERIAL USED TO REPLACE UNACCEPTABLE MATERIAL REMOVED BY
TESTING: ASPHALT BINDER THE CONTRACTOR.
CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, VMA, AND
DENSITY; RICE (VERIFICATION ONLY)
ONE PER LOT OF 3000 TONS [3000 t]
ASPHALT IN SLURRY SEAL SEE SLURRY SEAL & ASPHALT, EMULSIFIED
418

ASPHALT PRIMER WATERPROOF'G

ASTM D 41 813, 815 QPL 1

ASPHALT RELEASE AGENT

410 QPL 1
SEE REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT MATERIAL USED AND FOR
ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT 402
SEE MINERAL AGGREGATE IN ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT.

46
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
DENSITY & MOISTURE FOR
ACCEPTANCE:
(1) PIPE CULVERTS - ONE PER 125
LINEAL FEET OF TYPE PIPE CULVERT
SPECIFIED.
606, 607,
608, 609, (2) BOX CULVERTS - TWO PER
BACKFILL MATERIAL R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
610, 724 STRUCTURE.
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
801
(3) BRIDGE ENDS - ONE PER
LAYER.

ALL ACCEPTANCE TESTING BY

ARDOT

BAR MAT REINFORCEMENT

SEE REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC.

502, RE VERIFY DIPPED PLASTIC PROTECTION

507,606, OR PREMOLDED PLASTIC TIPS FOR METAL
COATING THICKNESS CHECKED BY R.E.
BAR SUPPORTS 609, 610, SUPPORTS
(HI-CHAIRS, SLAB & BEAM BOLSTERS) 613, 631,
2
640, 701 RE CERT
804
2
BLOTTER COURSE MATERIAL RE CERT
401

SAMPLED BY OR AT THE REQUEST OF

608, 613,
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS MAT'LS. DIV. MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV
617

CHECK TO SEE IF PRE-TESTED BY MATERIALS DIV.

617, 631, ONE PER SIZE PER LENGTH PER HEAT R.E. VERIFIES MARKINGS. (SEE ADD’L REQ. FOR HIGH STRENGTH
BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, (HIGH STRENGTH) MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
807 PER MANUFACTURER PER 2000 ITEM. GUARDRAIL BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS)
APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
BORROW
(ALSO SPECIAL PROVISION GRANULAR
210 SEE COMPACTED EMBANKMENT
BORROW)

BRIDGE BEARING PADS, PREFORMED FABRIC MFR. CERTIFIED TEST.

802, 807 APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV ON REQUEST.

BRIDGE BEARING PLATES, BRONZE

(INCLUDING SELF-LUBRICATING) 802,807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV ON REQUEST.

BRIDGE BEARING PLATES, COPPER-ALLOY 802, 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV ON REQUEST.

BRIDGE BEARINGS, ELASTOMERIC PADS 802, 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV ON REQUEST.

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE

ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND
TESTING R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
MFR./SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION TO NCHRP-350,
BRIDGE END TERMINAL 734 FOR CONCRETE COMPONENT SEE ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TL-3
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR
STRUCTURES;PORTLAND CEMENT MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS APPROVED BY ENGINEER
CONCRETE (PCC)
BRIDGE NAME PLATE 812 QPL 1

BRIDGE RAILING 806 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV

BURLAP-POLYETHYLENE SHEETING SEE POLYETHYLENE – BURLAP MAT PCC CURING.

CEMENT SEE PORTLAND CEMENT

47
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
AT LEAST 30 DAYS PRIOR TO
BEGINNING OF TREATMENT RE
SUBMIT SAMPLE SIZE OF 500 LBS.
[225 kg] OF AGGREGATE AND 20 LBS.
[9.1 kg] OF CEMENT FROM APPROVED
SOURCE. MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE DESIGN AND DETERMINES MAXIMUM
DENSITY; IF DETERMINED NECESSARY BY VISUAL OBSERVATION, THE %
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING DELETERIOUS WILL BE TESTED.
OF GRADATION, L.L. & P.I., DUST
RATIO, % DELETERIOUS, THICKNESS NOTE: SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE OF SAMPLING
(CORES) AND COMPRESSIVE AND APPROVAL.
CEMENT STABILIZED CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE 308, 504
STRENGTH (CORES):
ONE PER SUBLOT OF 1000 CU. YDS. R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
[750 cu m] ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE / VERIFICATION
TESTING OF GRADATION, L.L. & P.I.,
DUST RATIO, % DELETERIOUS,
THICKNESS (CORES) AND:
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (CORES):
ONE PER LOT OF 4000 CU. YDS. [3000
cu m]
RE AT LEAST 30 DAYS PRIOR TO
BEGINNING OF WORK, SUBMIT THE
FOLLOWING SAMPLE SIZE:
IF PLUS 4.75 mm [NO. 4] MATERIAL MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE DESIGN AND DETERMINES MAXIMUM
10% MAX. 250 LBS. [115 kg] LAB DENSITY;
IF PLUS 4.75 mm [NO. 4] MATERIAL
OVER 10% 500 LBS. [225 kg]
20 LBS. [9.1 kg] OF CEMENT FROM NOTE: SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND
302, 307, APPROVAL.
CEMENT TREATED BASE CRSE. APPROVED SOURCE.
504
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
THICKNESS, GRADATION, PLASTICITY ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
INDEX,: DENSITY AND MOISTURE
CONTENT: ONE PER 12,000 SQ. YDS.
[10,000 sq m]
R.E. PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING.

CHAIRS, REINFORCEMENT PRESET 503 R.E. CERT. 2

CHANNEL POST SIGN SUPPORT 729 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

801
COMMON EXCAVATION – STRUCTURES SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL
CONTRACTOR MAXIMUM
LABORATORY DENSITY:
ONE FOR EACH SOIL TYPE WITH A GRANULAR BORROW - PLASTICITY INDEX AND GRADATION TESTING
MINIMUM OF ONE PER JOB REQUIRED.
COMPACTED EMBANKMENT CONTRACTOR TO SPLIT MAXIMUM DENSITY SAMPLE WITH RE FOR
(ALSO BORROW, SHAPING ROADWAY SECTION, CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING VERIFICTION (RE TO RUN AT LEAST ONE SPLIT SAMPLE FOR VERIFICATION
SPECIAL PROVISION GRANULAR BORROW OF DENSITY & % MOISTURE: PER PROJECT. REMAINING SPLIT SAMPLES TO BE RUN ON AN AS NEEDED
210, 213,
AND, [WHEN NOT WASTED], EXCAVATION ONE FOR EACH 3000 CU.YD. BASIS)
[COMMON, ROCK & UNCLASSIFIED]) [2500 cu m]
MINIMUM OF ONE PER LAYER
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
DEPARTMENT VERIFICATION – ONE ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
FOR EACH 12,000 Cu Yds. [9168 m3]

631 SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES; REINFORCING

CONCRETE BARRIER WALL STEEL (BARS)
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
QPL1
SEE JOINT FILLER TYPE 2 FOR JOINT FILLER MATERIAL.

48
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
CONCRETE DITCH PAVING 605 ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TESTING
QPL1
SEE JOINT FILLER, PREF. ASPH., AASHTO M 213.

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
CONCRETE ISLAND 632
TESTING
QPL1
SEE JOINT FILLER, PREF. ASPH., AASHTO M 213.

. QPL1
CONCRETE PULL BOXES 711 SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
PERFORMANCE TEST UNDER 717 INCLUDED..
SEE REINFORCING STEEL (BARS)

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
CONCRETE SPILLWAY 614
TESTING
QPL1
IF PRECAST SEE PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MISC.

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES AND ALSO

R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE HANDRAILING
CONCRETE STEPS ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND SEE STEEL PRODUCTS FOR HANDRAILING.
633
INCLUDES CONCRETE WALKS TESTING
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

309, 500,
605, 606,
609, 610,
COPOLYMER/SYNTHETIC BLANKET 613-615,
R.E. CERT. 3
ASTM C 171 617,
631-634,
732, 802,
822
NOTE: MUST CONFORM TO ASTM B 152 / B152m.
COPPER WATER STOPS & FLASHING 802 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

NOTE: ASPHALT COATED PIPE:

504, 606, FIELD INSPECT COATING - 0.05 IN [1.3
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE, COATED & UNCOATED R.E. RETAINS CERTS.OF COMPLIANCE QPL1
609, 611, mm] MIN. AT CORRUGATION
(INCLUDE FLARED END SECTIONS) R.E. DOCUMENTS ASPHALT COATING
621, 805 CRESTS (INSIDE & OUTSIDE). THICKNESS 2
SEE SAMPLING METHOD ARDOT 65.

CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE TUBING, QPL1

611
UNDERDRAIN

504, 606,
COUPLING BANDS SAME REQS. AS CORRUG. METAL PIPE.
609, 611,
R.E. PERFORMS CONCRETE RIGID PAD:SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND MFR./SUPPLIER CERTIFY THAT MEETS NCHRP-350
CRASH CUSHIONS 732
TESTING OR MASH FOR TL-3 CRASH CUSHION.

CURBING SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

634 R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
SEE JOINT SEALER, CURB & GUTTER

49
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
728 SEE SIGNS, STANDARD
DELINEATOR

DELINEATOR, STEEL POST 618, 728 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

DITCH CHECKS
621 R.E. CERT. 3 ROCK-SEE STONE BACKFILL
STRAW, SAND BAG, ROCK

APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV.

501, 503
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
DOWEL BARS RESIN ANCHORING SYSTEM FOR SECURING BARS LISTED IN QPL
CONTRACTOR CERT. ON EPOXY COATING
507, 821

APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.

MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS 808 QPL1

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR 700 ENGINEER APPROVAL – TRAFFIC.
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE

ELECTRIC SERVICE POLES 716 SEE TREATED WOOD POLES

QPL1

501, 502, NOTE: IF REINFORCING STEEL SUPPLIER NOT ON QPL CONTACT BRIDGE
EPOXY COATED REINFORCING STEEL
804 CERT. OF DELIVERY. DIV. FOR ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

EPOXY COATERS LISTED IN QPL

QPL1
EROSION MATTING, ARDOT CLASS 1, 2 & 3 621, 626

815, 818
FABRIC, ASPHALT TREATED ASTM D173 QPL1

QPL1
FELT MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 815
(ASTM D 226 , TYPE II)

QPL1
FELT, ROOFING FOR BRIDGE JTS.
802 NOTE: PLANS MAY REFER TO MATERIAL AS 2.2 kg/sq m (45#) ROOFING
ASTM D 6830, CLASS S, TYPE IV
FELT

FENCE, CHAIN LINK AND TYPE A & B 619 QPL1

NOTE: SEE FENCE POST IF WOOD
2
619 R.E. CERT
FENCE, TYPE C & D

ONE SAMPLE OF 20 WOOD CORES APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

PER TREATMENT CHARGE, MIN. 2-IN CHECK WITH MAT'LS. DIV. FOR PRETESTED POSTS.
FENCE POST, WOODEN, TREATED 619
CORE LENGTH. NO TEST REQ'D. FOR TYPE C & D.
NONE IF LESS THAN 50 POSTS DELIVERY TICKETS WITH ARDOT SEALS.

FERTILIZER

R.E. CERT. 5
620, 621,
622, 623,
624

50
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
(1)NOTE: AGGR. MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS
AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
(1)ARDOT ACCEPT. TESTING FOR SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND
FILTER BLANKET; (1) STONE GRAD: ONE PER 500 TONS [450 t], 150 APPROVAL.
303, 816
(2) FABRIC LBS. ['70 kg] (1)R. E. APPROVES FIELD TEST REPORTS
MINIMUM OF ONE PER PROJECT.
(2) QPL1

FILTER FABRIC 611, 625, QPL1

WITH UNDERDRAIN, RIPRAP, & GABIONS 629, 816

606
FLARED END SECTION
SEE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE/ PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS MISC.

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

FLASHING BEACON CONTROLLER 703 ENGINEER APPROVAL – TRAFFIC.
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE

FLOOD GATES, AUTOMATIC 616 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV

RE ACCEPTANCE: UNIT WEIGHT AND CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGN APPROVED BY R.E.

FLOWABLE SELECT MATERIAL 206 FLOW ONE PER 50 CU. YD. [38 cu m] MATERIALS LISTED ON QPL
WITH MINIMUM OF ONE PER PROJECT. R.E. APPROVES ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

QPL1
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE
206, 307,
SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
FLY ASH 308, 309,
501, 503,
ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER
802
SEE QPL FOR INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS.

ONE BASKET AND 6 FT. [2 m] OF

GABIONS 629 LACING WIRE PER PROJECT APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
NOTE: IF LACING WIRE NOT USED,
CONTACT MAT'LS DIV.

NOTE: MAT'L MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR

TRANSFER. SEE CURRENT QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
GABIONS, STONE FOR FILLING 629 R.E. CERT. 2
SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
QPL1

QPL1
617, 633,
GALVANIZING, FIELD REPAIRING . NOTE: DRY FILM THICKNESS REQUIRED WILL DEPEND ON ORIGINAL
807
THICKNESS SPEC.

GATES, ALUMINUM/STEEL
619
R.E. CERT. 2

GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 621, 625 QPL1 (SEE QPL FOR REQUIREMENTS)

GLASS BEADS, TRAFFIC MARKINGS

604, 718, CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION

QPL1(PERMANENT BEADS)
719 AND INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS
MFR. CERT. ON EACH BATCH.

51
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

FOR MINERAL AGGREGATE (SECTION

403): GRADATION, DECANTATION, %
CRUSHED PARTICLES, & %
DELETERIOUS:

ONE PER 500 TONS (400 CU.YD.) [450 t

(310 cu m)] MATERIALS MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL 611
R.E. APPROVES ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.
FOR AGGREGATE (COARSE) FOR
CONCRETE (SECTION 802):
GRAD., DECANT. & FINENESS MOD.
(FM)
ONE PER 500 CU. YDS. [400 cu m]
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
SAMPLING AND TESTING
SLAG CEMENT UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE
206, 307, QPL1
(FORMERLY GROUND GRANULATED BLAST FURNACE SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS
308, 309,
SLAG (GGBFS))
501, 503, RANDOM SAMPLING BY REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER
802 SEE QPL FOR INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS.

701, 712,
GROUND ROD R.E. CERT. 2
714, 715

GUARD CABLE 618 QPL1

APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.

GUARD CABLE, ACCESSORIES 618 ONE OF EACH ACCESSORY PER
ALSO SEE REQS FOR DELINEATORS
PROJECT

GUARD CABLE, STEEL POST 618 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV

ONE SAMPLE (20 CORES)(CORE

LENGTH – SAWN 2.5IN.; ROUND 2.0IN.)
GUARD CABLE, WOODEN POST 618 APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
PER 1,000 POSTS OR ONE PER
TREATMENT CHARGE (TREATMENT
BATCH)

MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. OF COMPLIANCE QPL1

GUARDRAIL 617, 639
NOTE: SEE QPL FOR GALV. COAT. REPAIR

QPL1

PRETESTED BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS WILL BE CERTIFIED BY

SUPPLIER BY REFERENCE TO MAT'LS. DIV. LAB TEST NUMBER.
617, 631,
GUARDRAIL, HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS.
639, 802 ONE PER SIZE PER PROJECT
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST SAMPLES TESTED AND APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
(IF NOT PRETESTED)
R.E. VERIFIES MARKINGS AND RECORDS IN DWR.

ONE SAMPLE (20 CORES) PER 1,000

GUARDRAIL, WOODEN POST 617, 639 APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
POSTS OR ONE PER TREATMENT
CHARGE (TREATMENT BATCH)

MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. OF COMPLIANCE QPL1

GUARDRAIL, STEEL POST 617, 639
RE RETAIN DELIVERY TICKETS

RE PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. QPL1
GUARDRAIL, TERMINAL ANCHOR POST 617, 639 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
R.E. RETAINS DELIVERY TICKETS . SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
CONCRETE

52
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
MFR. CERTIFICATION THAT TERMINAL MEETS
CONTRACTOR PROVIDES MANUFACTURER DETAILS AND INSTALLATION
GUARDRAIL, TERMINAL(TYPE 2) 617, 639 NCHRP REPORT 350 OR MASH FOR TL-3 TERMINAL
MANUALS

HAND RAILING
633 MFR. CERT. TEST APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
WELDER CERTIFICATION REQUIRED.

FLEXIBLE PAD: SEE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE CONCRETE HOT MIX
MFR./SUPPLIER CERT. THAT MEETS NCHRP-350
IMPACT ATTEN. BARRIER 731 SAMPLING AND TESTING RIGID PAD: SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
OR MASH FOR TL-3 CRASH CUSHIONS

609, 610,
IRON CASTINGS (AASHTO M105, CLASS 35B) QPL1
807

505, 605,
QPL1
JOINT FILLER, PREF. ASPH, AASHTO M 213 632, 633,
634

501, 503,
CUTBACK-1 QT. [ONE L] METAL CAN QPL1
JOINT FILLER TYPE 1, MC-250 OR SS-1 WITH SAWDUST 504, 509,
EMULSION - 1 GAL. [4 L.] PL. JUG UNCERTIFIED SHIPMENT MUST BE TESTED PRIOR TO USING.
512

501, 504,
JOINT FILLER TYPE 2
617, 631, QPL1
AASHTO M 153, TYPE I (SPONGE RUBBER)
802

JOINT FILLER 501, 503,

BACKER ROD (ASTM D5249 TYPE 1, FOR TYPES 504, 509, QPL1
3, 4 & 5; 511, 634,
(ASTM D5249 TYPE 2, FOR TYPES 3 & 4) 802

JOINT SEALER, CURB AND GUTTER 634 QPL1

JOINT SEALER, TYPES 3 THROUGH 6 501, 503,

(TYPE 3 SILICONE [ASTM D 5893] (PRIMERLESS), TYPE 4 504, 509, QPL1
SILICONE [ASTM D 5893] [REQUIRES PRIMER], 511, 634,
TYPE 6 HOT POUR [ASTM D 6690 TYPE 1] 802

53
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION

LIME, AGRICULTURAL 620, 622 pH SOIL SAMPLE REQUIRED 5 LBS. R.E . CERT. 2 MATERIALS DIVISION PROVIDES LIME REQUIREMENT
[2.3 kg] OF SOIL
QPL1
LIME, HYDRATED & QUICK (PEBBLE)
301, 418 ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS CERTIFIED SUPPLIER: SAMPLE AS REQUESTED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT

AT LEAST 30 DAYS PRIOR TO
BEGINNING OF LIME TREATMENT,
SUBMIT 50 LBS [25 kg] OF EACH
DIFFERENT SOIL & 10 LBS [4.5 kg] OF
LIME TO BE USED ON PROJECT.

CONTRACTOR MAXIMUM MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE DESIGN.

LABORATORY DENSITY
DETERMINATION: ONE FOR EACH R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
SOIL TYPE WITH A MINIMUM OF ONE ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
PER JOB.
LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 301
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OF DENSITY, MOISTURE CONTENT
&THICKNESS: ONE FOR EACH 12,000
SQ.YD. [10,000 sq m] (THICKNESS – FOR LIME SEE LIME, HYDRATED OR QUICK (PEBBLE).
QUALITY CONTROL)

R.E. VERIFICATION TESTING OF

DENSITY , MOISTURE CONTENT &
THICKNESS: ONE FOR EACH 48,000
SQ. YDS.[40,000 sq. m]
LINSEED OIL
AASHTO M 233 (ASTM D 260) 803 QPL1

APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.

LUMBER, TREATED ONE SAMPLE OF 20 CORES (LENGTH
817
UP TO 3IN.) PER 1,000 PIECES
CHECK MAT'LS. DIV. FOR POSSIBLE PRETEST

MAILBOX (INCL. POST & HARDWARE) 637 R.E . CERT. 2 QPL1 (Alternate Supports)

MANHOLE STEPS 609, 610, QPL1

640
MECHANICAL REBAR SPLICES 503, 804
QPL1
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH WALLS (MSE WALLS)
SPECIAL
(INCLUDES RETAINING WALLS AND MODULAR BLOCK QPL1
PROVISION
WALLS)
309 500,
605, 606,
MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND 609, 610,
ASTM C 309, TYPE 1 (CLEAR),TYPE 1-D (CLEAR W/DYE) 613-615, QPL1
OR TYPE 2 617, 631-
634, 802,
822

MINERAL AGGR. IN ASPHALT SURF. TREATMENT SUBMIT TO MAT'LS. DIV. FOR MATERIAL MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR
CLASSES 1 THRU 5 TESTING: 50 LBS. [25 kg] TRANSFER.
IF LOOSE UNIT WEIGHT IS DESIRED.
402, 403, R.E. DETERMINES RATE OF APPLICATION
611 ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF
GRADATION, DECANTATION, % QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
CRUSHED PARTICLES, &%
DELETERIOUS: ONE PER 500 TONS R.E. APPROVES FIELD TEST REPORTS
(400 CU.YD.) [450 t (310 cu m)]

54
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
406, 405,
MINERAL FILLER 407,409, SOURCES ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN
AASHTO M 17 411,
417,418

MULCH CONTROL NETTING 621 R.E . CERT. 3

NOTE: R.E. VERIFIES WEIGHT AND SIZE

SEE TACKIFIER IF APPLICABLE

MULCH COVER 620, 621, R.E . CERT. 3
FOR WATER REQUIREMENTS SEE WATER.
622
NEOPRENE PADS 807 SEE BRIDGE BEARINGS, ELASTOMERIC PADS

NEOPRENE TROUGH 807 MFR. CERT. TESTS APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.

MATERIALS DIVISION PREPARES THE MIX DESIGN. AT LEAST 10 WORKING

SUBMIT 50 LBS. [25 kg] OF EACH DAYS PRIOR TO THE BEGINNING OF FIELD PRODUCTION,
AGGREGATE TO BE USED IN THE
BLEND ALONG WITH AVERAGE MIX WILL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AT START OF PRODUCTION
STOCKPILE GRADATIONS. IF ONLY OR AFTER AN INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 120 CALENDAR DAYS.
ONE MATERIAL TO BE USED,SUBMIT
75LBS. [40 kg]. AGGR MUST HAVE A CURRENT ABRASION AND SOUNDNESS SEE QPL OR
CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OPEN GRADED ASPHALT BASE COURSE 417 OF ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT AND
GRADATION: ONE PER SUBLOT OF R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
750 TONS [750 t] ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING, OF
ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT AND (NO DENSITY REQ.) MATERIAL CONSOLIDATED TO RE's SATISFACTION.)
GRADATION: ONE PER LOT OF 3000
TONS [3000 t] MINIMUM OF ONE PER ARDOT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTS FOR ACCEPT. AND ADJUSTMENT ON
JOB, MATERIAL USED TO REPLACE UNACCEPTABLE MATERIAL REMOVED BY
THE CONTRACTOR.

CONTRACTOR PREPARES MIX DESIGN

RE APPROVES MIX DESIGN
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OPEN GRADED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE BASE 310 OF GRADATION: ONE PER LOT OF (NO DENSITY REQ. MATERIAL CONSOLIDATED TO RE's SATISFACTION.)
2500 Sq Yds. (2000 Sq M.)
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
609, 638,
PAINT, MISCELLANEOUS 712, 714, R.E. CHECKS DRY FILM THICKNESS (MINIMUM OF 0.125 mm [5 MILS])
(ALUMINUM EPOXY PAINT SYSTEM) 715, 805, QPL1
811

PAINT, STEEL STRUCTURES 807, 820 QPL1 (SAME MANUFACTURER FOR ALL COATINGS IN SYSTEM)
PRIMER - TIE COAT – URETHANE

CONTRACTOR CERT OF CONSTRUCTION AND

604,
INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS.
PAINT, REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKING QPL1 (CHECK QPL FOR APPROVED BATCH)
MFR. CERT. EACH LOT FOR PAINT. BEADS ON QPL ALSO
718
MFR. CERT. BEADS.. CERT. ON BEADS NOT REQ. IF USING FUSED PREFORMED MARKINGS.

PAPER, INSULATING, WATERPROOFING R.E . CERT. 2

815
IF ASPHALT, SEE ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT MIX
IF CONCRETE, SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT REPAIR OVER CULVERTS R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE FOR STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC
615
SAMPLING AND TESTING
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN SEE SIGNS (STANDARD) FOR ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSIDIARY SIGNS
707
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE
ENGINEER APPROVAL – TRAFFIC

55
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
604, CONTRACTOR CERT FOR CONSTRUCTION AND QPL1
PERMANENT PVT.MRK.TAPE
719, 720 INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS
MFR. CERT. TESTS APPROVED BY Bridge Division
PERMANENT STEEL DECK FORMS 802
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
SEE WELDING MATERIALS

PILING, PRECAST CONCRETE 805

SEE PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONC. PRODUCTS, STRUCTURAL

QPL1 (NOT NOTED IN SITEMANAGER)

APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIVISION

MFR. CERT. TEST SEE WELDING MATERIALS

PILING & ACCESSORIES, STEEL 805, 811
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
FOR CONCRETE IN STEEL SHELL PILES SEE PORTLAND CEMENT
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.

FOR PAINTING SEE PAINT MISCELLANEOUS.

QPL1
PILING, “H”, STEEL POINTS 805 WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
SEE WELDING MATERIALS
QPL (NOT NOTED IN SITEMANAGER)
MFR. CERT. TEST APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIVISION
PILING, “SHELL”, STEEL TIPS 805, 811
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.
SEE WELDING MATERIALS
ONE SAMPLE OF 30 CORES PER 1000
PILING, TREATED TIMBER 818 PILES OR ONE PER TREATMENT APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
CHARGE (TREATMENT BATCH) CHECK MAT'LS. DIV. FOR PRETESTED PILING.

PIPE JOINT SEAL GASKET 606, 607, QPL1

609, 610
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
QPL1(FILTER FABRIC & PIPE)
PIPE UNDERDRAIN 611 SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR
SEE MINERAL AGGREGATE OR AGGREGATE FOR PCC - STRUCTURES.
AGGREGATES.
PITCH, (ASTM D450-96) 817, 818 MFR. CERTIFIED TESTS APPROVED BY MATERIALS DIVISION
QPL1
NOTE: AASHTO M 294 PIPE MUST BE TYPE 'S' WHICH HAS A SMOOTH
MFR. CERT. OF DELIVERY
INNER LINING AND CORRUG. (ANNULAR) OUTER SURFACE.
PLASTIC PIPE 606, 621
USED PIPE FOR SLOPE DRAINS CERTIFIED
AASHTO M 294 OR M 304 SHOULD BE PRINTED ON PIPE. (TYPE 'C' CAN BE
BY RE 2
USED FOR SLOPE DRAINS - SECT. 621)

POLYETHYLENE SELF ADHERING WATERPROOF.

815 QPL1
ALSO SEE WATERPROOFING

309, 500,
605, 606,
609, 610,
POLYETHYLENE SHEETING 613-615, R.E . CERT. 3 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.10 mm (4 MILS)
617, 631-
634, 732,
802, 822

309, 500,
605, 606,
POLYETHYLENE-BURLAP MAT PCC CURING 609, 610,
ASTM C 171 613-615, R.E . CERT. 3
617, 631-
634, 732,
802, 822

POLYURETHANE, COLD APPLIED WATERPROOF'G 815 QPL1

ALSO SEE WATERPROOFING

56
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
SEE PC CONCRETE PAVEMENT

(1) PROPORTIONS CAN COMPLY WITH SECTION 501 FOR PAVING

CONCRETE OR SECTION 802 FOR CLASS A OR CLASS S CONCRETE.
(2)COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH WILL BE DETERMINED BY CYLINDERS.
(3) A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2100 PSI (15 MPa) MUST BE
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) BASE 309
OBTAINED BEFORE OPENING TO TRAF.
(4) THICKNESS WILL BE DETERMINED BY SOUNDING AFTER FRESH
CONCRETE HAS BEEN STRUCK OFF.

SINCE SEVERAL CLASSES OF CONCRETE CAN BE UTILIZED FOR PCC

BASE, AIR CONTENT MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE.
QPL1 (CURING COMPOUND & JOINT FILLER)
R.E .PERFORMS CONCRETE
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY 505
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING & TESTING .R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE FIELD TEST REPORTS.

SEE AGGREGATES PCC - STRUCTURES FOR INFORMATION ON

GRADATION TESTING.

CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGNS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE R.E. FOR

REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO PRODUCTION
504, 505, CONTR. ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF
605, 606, AIR CONTENT, SLUMP AND THE DEPARTMENT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTING REQUIRED FOR WATER,
609-611, COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH: ONE SET CEMENT, FLY ASH, SOUNDNESS AND LOS ANGELES WEAR
613-615, PER SUBLOT OF 100 CU. YDS. OFAGGREGATES. SEE QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES 617, 619, [75 cu m] FOR EACH CLASS WITH A SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
(INCLUDES CLASSES A, B, M, S, S(AE), SEAL AND 631-633, MINIMUM OF ONE SET PER BRIDGE
OVERLAY CONCRETE WITH AND WITHOUT FLY ASH. 701, 702, STRUCTURE. CONTRACTOR CASTS TWO(2) CONCRETE CYLINDERS PER SET OF TESTS;
ALSO INCLUDES SECTION 501 CONCRETE WHEN NOT 712, 714, ALSO, FOR CLASS S(AE), A MINIMUM AVERAGE IS USED FOR ACCEPTANCE VALUE
USED FOR PAVEMENT.) 715, 724, OF ONE SET PER DECK POUR.
730-732, R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
734, 802, ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING: AIR ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
805, 816, CONTENT, SLUMP AND COMPRESSIVE
822 STRENGTH; ONE SET PER LOT OF 400 ADD'L CYLINDERS MAY BE CAST BY CONTR.FOR SCHEDULING PURPOSES
CU. YDS. [300 cu m] . TO DETERMINE TIME FOR STRIPPING FORMS OR LOADING THE
STRUCTURE.
TESTING OF GRADATION OF AGGREGATES FOR CLASS M CONCRETE IS
NOT REQUIRED.
QPL 1 (CURING COMPOUND)
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) PAVEMENT, 501, 503, CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING 802.06 WHEN CYLINDERS ARE USED FOR Acceptance.
HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONCRETE PAVEMENT, 504, 507, FOR AIR CONTENT, SLUMP AND
CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT, 511, 613, CORE RESULTS (COMPRESSIVE CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGN WITH CERTIFICATION OF LOW ALKALI CEMENT
HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED 734 STRENGTH AND THICKNESS): ONE OR POTENTIAL ALKALI REACTIVITY TEST AND JOB MIX FORMULA
CONCRETE PAVEMENT, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PER SUBLOT OF 1000 CU. YDS. SUBMITTED TO RE MINIMUM 15 WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO USE.
PAVEMENT PATCHING, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE [750 cu m]( CYLINDERS AND WET
SHOULDER (ADD-ON), APPROACH SLAB, APPROACH THICKNESS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONTRACTOR TO SPLIT QUALITY CONTROL AGGREGATE SAMPLES WITH
GUTTERS CONCRETE PAVEMENT PATCHING.) RE FOR VERIFICATION TESTING

ARDOT ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR RE APPROVES MIX DESIGN

CORE RESULTS: ONE PER LOT OF
4000 CU. YDS. [3000 cu m] SEE AGGREGATES ( PCCP) FOR INFORMATION ON GRADATION TESTING.

OPENING PAVEMENT TO TRAFFIC R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
AFTER 7 DAYS (24 HRS IF HIGH EARLY ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
STRENGTH CONCRETE PAVEMENT
SPECIFIED) AND CONTRACTOR TEST AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, ADDITIONAL TESTING MAY BE PERFORMED
RESULTS OF REPRESENTATIVE TEST FOR CONFIRMING PRICE REDUCTIONS OR REJECTION DUE TO
CYLINDERS ACHIEVING MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS.
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 3000
PSI (21.0 MPa) ARDOT WILL PERFORM ALL TESTS FOR ACCEPT.AND ADJUSTMENT ON
MATERIAL USED TO REPLACE UNACCEPTABLE MATERIAL REMOVED BY
THE CONTRACTOR.

QPL 1 (CURING COMPOUND)

57
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
PORTLAND CEMENT, TYPES I, II & III
FLYASH
QPL1
SLAG CEMENT 206, 300,
CERTIFIED SUPPLIER: SAMPLE AS REQUESTED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
PORTLAND-POZZOLAN CEMENT, TYPE IP(##) 418, 500, ONE - 10 LB [4.5 kg] BAG WITH LINER
SLAG-MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT, 600, 800
UNCERTIFIED SUPPLIER:ONE SAMPLE PER SHIPMENT
TYPE IS(##) R.E. RETAINS MFR. CERT.DELIVERY TICKETS
SLAG-MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT (PORTLAND
BLAST-FURNACE SLAG CEMENT)
PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER 604 CONTRACTOR CERT.

606 SEE REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE

PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MISC.

(INCLUDE FLARED END SECTIONS, CURTAIN QPL1
WALLS, CATTLE PASSES, UNDERDRAIN 606, 609, MFR. CERTS. OF DELIVERY
INDIVIDUAL PCS. MAY BE STAMPED BY ARDOT INSPECTORS
OUTLET PROTECTORS, DI's, JUNCTION BOXES, 611, 614
CONCRETE SPILLWAY)

APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV INDIVIDUAL PCS STAMPED BY ARDOT OR

AGENT
PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONC. PRODUCTS, MFR. CERTS.OF DELIVERY INSPECTED AT MFR. BY ARDOT, OTHER STATE DOT OR ARDOT
802, 805
STRUCTURAL CONTRACTED
COMMERCIAL FIRM
QPL1
SEE PLANS FOR GROUT REQUIREMENTS.
QPL1
INDIVIDUAL PCS. STAMPED WITH ARKANSAS CONCRETE PIPE
ASSOCIATION (ARCPA)(FORMALLY CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION OF
ARKANSAS (CPAA)) OR AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION (ACPA)
CERTIFIED SEAL (STAMP) WITH CAST DATE AND MANFACTURER'S
IDENTIFICATION. SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMIT TO BRIDGE FOR REVIEW &
MFR. CERTS.OF DELIVERY APPROVAL.
PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE, BOX CULVERT 607
SEE PLANS FOR GROUT REQUIREMENTS.

SEE JOINT SEALER FOR REQUIREMENTS

SEE CURING COMPOUND REQUIREMENTS.

SEE ASPHALT WATERPROOFING REQUIREMENTS.

PREFORMED FABRIC PADS 802,807 SEE BRIDGE BEARING PADS, PREFORMED FABRIC

QPL1

PREFORMED JOINT SEAL, AASHTO M 297 809 BRIDGE DIV. APPROVES DIMENSION DRAWINGS

LUBRICANT-ADHESIVE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN QPL1
PREFORMED LOOP DETECTOR 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.

PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT STEEL, ONE SAMPLE 12 FT.[4 m ]PER HEAT

802, 805 NUMBER PER SHIPMENT (PER 7 COILS MFR. CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV.
SEVEN WIRE STRAND
MAX.)
PRETIMED CONTROLLER 702 SAME REQ. AS ACTUATED CONTROLLER

PROCESS LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 301 SEE LIME TREATED SUBGRADE

PROTECTIVE SURFACE TREATMENT, QPL1

803
CLASS 1,2 & 3
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS & ADHESIVES 604, 721 CONTRACTOR CERT. OF CONSTRUCTION AND QPL1
INTERIM PAVEMENT MARKINGS

58
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
200 LBS [90 kg] FOR MAXIMUM
DENSITY TEST
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE SAME REQUIREMENTS AS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR COMPACTION
TESTING OF DENSITY AND EXCEPT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 95% OF MAXIMUM LABORATORY
MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER DENSITY.
RECONSTRUCTED BASE COURSE 305 1000 TONS [1000 t] SOUNDINGS ARE NOT REQUIRED
R.E. PERFORMS VERIFICATION
TESTING OF DENSITY AND R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
MOISTURE CONTENT: ONE PER ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
4000 TONS [4000 t] / CU. YDS
(cu m)

QPL1
INDIVIDUAL PCS. STAMPED WITH ARKANSAS CONCRETE PIPE
ASSOCIATION (ARCPA)(FORMALLY CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION OF
MFR. CERTS.OF DELIVERY
REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 606, 621 ARKANSAS (CPAA)) OR AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION (ACPA)
CERTIFIED SEAL (STAMP) WITH CAST DATE AND MANFACTURER'S
IDENTIFICATION. SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL FOR ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS

606, 607, QPL1

REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE GASKET
609, 610

501-504,
605-607,
609-611
QPL1
613, 614,
NOTE: IF SUPPLIER NOT ON QPL, CONTACT BRIDGE. DIV. FOR
617, 631,
REINFORCING STEEL (BARS) CERTS.OF DELIVERY ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
712, 714,
715, 724,
ALSO SEE EPOXY REINFORCING STEEL
730, 732,
802, 804,
805, 822

502, 503,
504, 507,
615, 701, ONE FULL WIDTH BY 5 FT. [1.5 m] PER MFR. CERTIFIED TEST WITH MILL ANALYSIS APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV.
REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC
702, 711, 20,000 LBS[9000 kg] REPORT CHECK WITH BRIDGE. DIV. FOR POSSIBLE PRETEST & TAG
732, 804,
816, 822

QPL1
RELEASE AGENT (NON-PETROLEUM) 410

SAME REQUIREMENTS AS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR COMPACTION,

REMOVING & REPLACING BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
209
SURFACING ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE AGGREGATE GRADATION AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 822.
REPAIR AND OVERLAY OF CONCRETE BRIDGE DECKS 822 SAMPLING AND TESTING DENSITY TESTING ACCORDING TO ASTM C 1040.
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
501, 507,
RESIN ANCHORING SYSTEMS QPL1
804
SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES, REINFORCING
STEEL (BARS) AND REINFORCING STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC.
RIPRAP, CONCRETE
816
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

59
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
QPL1
RIPRAP, DUMPED (FOUNDATION PROTECTION RIPRAP, SEE CURRENT QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
621, 816 R.E . CERT. 2
DUMPED RIPRAP – GROUTED) AND APPROVAL.

QPL1
R.E . CERT. 2 MAT'L MAY HAVE CURRENT TEST RESULTS AVAILABLE FOR TRANSFER.
ROCK BUTTRESS 630 SEE CURRENT QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING
AND APPROVAL

ROCK EXCAVATION 210 SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

SAFETY END SECTIONS R.E. RETAINS CERTS.OF COMPLIANCE QPL1

606

SAND BAGS 621 SEE DITCH CHECKS.

MATERIALS PERFORMS MAXIMUM LABORATORY DENSITY
MAXIMUM LABORATORY DENSITY
SUBMIT 150 LBS [70 kg] SAMPLE SIZE
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
SCARIFYING AND RECOMPACTING SHOULDERS 216 CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
FOR DENSITY& % MOISTURE: ONE
FOR EACH 6000 SQ.YD. [5000 sq m]

SEED (INCLUDING WILD FLOWERS) 620-623 R.E. CERT. 4 MUST MEET ARKANSAS STATE PLANT BOARD RULES AND REGULATIONS

FOR MAXIMUM DENSITY: IF PLUS NO. MAXIMUM LABORATORY DENSITY DETERMINED BY ARDOT.
4 [4.75 mm] MATERIAL 11%-30%
302, (SUBMIT SAMPLE SIZEOF 150 LBS. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE FREE OF DELETERIOUS MATTER.
SELECTED MATERIAL 307,504 [70 kg])
IF PLUS NO. 4 [4.75 mm] MATERIAL R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
OVER 30% (SUBMIT SAMPLE SIZE OF ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
200 LBS. [90 kg])

SHAPING ROADWAY SECTION 213 SAME REQUIREMENTS AS R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
COMPACTED EMBANKMENT ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.

SHEET COPPER 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV.

SHEET ZINC ASTM B 69 TYPE II 807, 818 MFR. CERTIFIED APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.

SIGNS, CONSTRUCTION 604 SEE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES IN CONST. ZONES

SIGN POSTS – SEE U-CHANNEL POSTS

QPL1 (SHEETING)
618, 706, . SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVED BY ENGINEER
SIGNS, STANDARD 707, 723,
(INCLUDES GUIDE SIGNS & DELINEATORS) 725, ALUMINUM BLANKS AND ACCESSORIES: MFR SEE PARTICULAR TYPE OF SUPPORT (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ACCEPTANCE
726,728 CERTIFIED TEST CRITERIA

MFR CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS . DIV.

SIGN SUPPORT, BREAKAWAY FOR FOUNDATION, SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE FOR STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING STEEL(BARS)
730 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
CONCRETE APPROVED BY BRIDGE . DIV.

SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVED BY ENGINEER.

SIGN STRUCTURES: OVRHD, BRIDGE MOUNTED, FOR FOUNDATION, SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR
CANTILEVER STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING STEEL(BARS)
724 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST FOR MATERIALS
MATERIALS APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF COMMERCIAL ALTERNATIVES WITH DESIGN CALCULATIONS AND
CONTRACTOR CERT. WELDING & FABRICATION.
CONCRETE CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN BY PROFESSIONAL ENGR. APPROVED BY
ENGINEER
SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVED BY ENGINEER BEFORE FABRICATION .

60
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
SILICONE, ASPHALT ADDITIVE 409 QPL1
CONTRACTOR MIX DESIGNS SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO MAT'LS. DIV. FOR
REVIEW AT LEAST FIVE (5) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO USE. IF
AGGREGATE SOURCES NOT ON QPL, ALLOW AT LEAST 10 WORKING
DAYS FOR SAMPLING AND TESTING BEFORE REVIEW.
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING ALSO, PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK, EMULSION SUPPLIER SHALL
ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT AND FURNISH MATERIALS DIVISION SAMPLES OF BASE ASPHALT AND
GRADATION: ONE PER SUBLOT OF POLYMER USED IN EMULSION.
30,000 SQ. YDS. [25,000 sq m]
SLURRY SEAL 418 NOTE: AGGR MUST HAVE A CURRENT ABRASION AND SOUNDNESS. SEE
ARDOT ACCEPTANCE/VERIFICATION QPL OR CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. FOR SOURCE SAMPLING AND APPROVAL.
TESTING ONE PER LOT OF 120,000 SQ. LIMESTONE MINERAL AGGREGATE NOT ALLOWED.
YDS. [100,000 sq m]
ASPHALT EMULSION: SAME REQS. AS ASPHALT PENETRATING PRIME

R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL

ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
Silicone Joint Sealant 809 MFR. CERTIFIED

SOD MULCH R.E . CERT. 2

622 ALSO SEE FERTILIZER; LIME, AGRICULTURAL; TACKIFIER, MULCH.
.2
SODDING, SOLID R.E . CERT
624 ALSO SEE FERTILIZER

ACCEPTED WITH MIX DESIGN.

SOFTENING AGENT FOR RECYCLED ASPHALT PAV. 416 MFR. CERTIFIED
SAMPLED BY / OR AT REQUEST OF MAT'LS. DIV.
SEE REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT TREATED BASE CRS. OR SELECTED
SOIL AGGREGATE
MATERIAL AS APPROPRIATE
STAPLES, EROSION MATTING 626 R.E . CERT. 3
STEEL MUST BE GALVANIZED.
APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
SEE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.
SEE REINFORCING STEEL (BARS)
STEEL GRATE ASSEMBLY 613 R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT.
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
CONCRETE.
R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
ACCEPTANCE AND FIELD TEST REPORTS.
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
STEEL PIPE SIPHON 612 SEE WELDING MATERIALS.
CERT. WELDER REQUIRED
.SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

STEEL PRODUCTS (NOT LISTED ELSEWHERE) 500, 600, MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
700, 800
STONE BACKFILL(INCLUDES MAT'L FOR ROCK DITCH
207, 621 R.E . CERT. 2 SEE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE.
CHECKS AND ROCK FILTER)
APPROVED BY BRIDGES DIV.
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT.
STRUCTURAL PLATE PIPE AND ARCHES IF ASPHALT COATING SPECIFIED, FIELD INSPECT COATING -0.05 IN [1.3
608
(INCLUDES BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS.) mm] MINIMUM AT CORRUGATION CRESTS (IN & OUTSIDE). SEE SAMPLING
R.E . CERT. 2 (ASPHALT COATING THICKNESS)
METHOD 65.
SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL.
QPL1 (FABRICATOR)
APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 807 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST MATERIALS APPROVED FABRICATION LETTER REQUIRED.
NOTE: INSPECTED AT MFR. BY ARDOT, OTHER STATE DOT OR ARDOT
CONTRACTED COMMERCIAL FIRM
STRUCTURAL STEEL, OTHER
500, 600,
MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATORS CERT. APPROVED BY BRIDGEDIV.
700, 800

61
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS 807 QPL1
MFR. CERT. SEE STRUCTURAL STEEL.
CONTRACTOR MAXIMUM
LABORATORY DENSITY ONE FOR
EACH SOIL TYPE WITH A MINIMUM OF
ONE PER JOB

CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING

OF DENSITY& % MOISTURE: ONE FOR
EACH 12,000 SQ.YD. [10,000 sq m]
WITH A MINIMUM OF ONE PER LAYER
SUBGRADE, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, AND 212, 214, R.E. REVIEWS, INITIALS AND/OR AUTHORIZES IN SITEMANAGER ALL
TRENCHING AND SHOULDER PREPARATION 215 RE WILL PERFORM VERIFICATION ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION FIELD TEST REPORTS.
TESTING FOR MAXIMUM
LABORATORY DENSITY, ONE FOR
EACH SOIL TYPE WITH A MINIMUM OF
ONE PER JOB.

R.E. WILL PERFORM VERIFICATION

TESTING OF DENSITY AND %
MOISTURE: ONE FOR EACH 48,000
SQ. YDS. [40,000 sq m]

620, 621, QPL1

TACKIFIER, MULCH
622 ASPHALT: QPL SOURCE

TACTILE PANELS 641 QPL1

CONTRACTOR CERT.-BRIDGE
TEMPORARY STRUCTURE, MATERIALS 603
R.E . CERT. 3 -- CULVERTS

TEXTURED COATING FINISH 802 QPL1

QPL1
BEADS ON QPL
THERMOPLASTIC PVT. MRK. 718, 719
MARKINGS PLACED ON CONCRETE REQUIRE PAINT PAVEMENT MARKINGS
AS A PRIMER OR A PRIMER RECOMMENDED BY THERMOPLASTIC
MANUFACTURER.

TOPSOIL 628 R.E . CERT. 2

APPROVED BY BRIDGE. DIV.

501-503, MFR. CERTIFIED TEST
TIE BARS
507 CONTRACTOR CERT. ON EPOXY COATING. RESIN ANCHORING SYSTEM FOR SECURING BARS LISTED ON QPL

ONE SAMPLE OF 20 WOOD CORES APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

TIMBERS, BRIDGE, TREATED 817 PER TREATMENT CHARGE, MIN 3-IN CHECK WITH MAT’LS DIV. FOR PRETEST
CORE LENGTH..
TIMBERS BRIDGE, HARDWARE 817 CONTRACTOR CERTIFIED TEST. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV.
(BARS,PLATES,STR. SHAPES,CASTINGS, ETC.)
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES IN CONST. ZONES,
CONTRACTOR CERTIFIED (INCLUDES SIGNS, CONTRACTOR CERT. (NCHRP 350 OR MASH CERT
VERT. PANELS, DRUMS, PRECAST CONCRETE 604
WITH FHWA LETTER)
BARRIERS, BARRICADES, CONSTR. PVMT. MRKS.,
INTERIM PVMT. MRKS., AND CONES

604 R.E . CERT. 2 R.E. DETERMINES MUTCD COMPLIANCE

TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES IN CONST. ZONES
ADV. WARNING ARROW PANEL & PORTABLE
CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN

62
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
FOR FOUNDATION, SEE PORTLAND
CEMENT CONCRETE
FOR STRUCTURES AND REINFORCING CERTIFICATION BY MANUFACTURER OR DESIGN PLANS CERTIFIED BY P.E. SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND RECORD
TRAFFIC SIGNAL MAST ARM AND POLE, PEDESTAL POLE 712, '714, STEEL (BARS) SUPPLIER THAT ITEM FABRICATED COMPLY WITH
AND SPAN WIRE SUPPORT POLE WITH FOUNDATION. 715 DESIGN AND MATERIALS COMPLY WITH SEE QPL FOR MAT'LS USED FOR FIELD REPAIR OF ALUMINUM PAINT
R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE SPECIFICATIONS.
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
CONCRETE
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, FEEDER WIRE 704 ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT 709 R.E. CERT. 2

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC

TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD & PEDESTRIAN HEAD 706, 707
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR SEE SIGNS (STANDARD) FOR ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSIDIARY SIGNS
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, LOOP SEALANT & BACKER ROD 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL QPL1
BY ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, LOOP WIRE 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
705 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC SIGNAL, LOOP WIRE IN DUCT
BY ENGINEER

TRAFFIC SIGNALNON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC OR PE) 710 R.E. CERT.2

CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, SIGNAL CABLE 708 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, SPAN WIRE 713 QPL1

713 CONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER CERTIFIED

TRAFFIC SIGNAL, SPAN WIRE ACCESSORIES
CONTRACTOR CERTIFIES:CLASS, SIZE, &
TREATED WOOD POLES 716
TREATMENT
(Also - ELEC.SERV. POLES)

TRENCHING AND SHOULDER PREPARATION 215 SEE SUBGRADE.

618, 728,
U CHANNEL POST MFR. CERTIFIED MILL TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.
729

UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION – STRUCTURES 801 SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL

UNDERDRAIN, OUTLET PROTECTORS 611 SEE PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS, MISCELLANEOUS

UNDERDRAIN, PIPE LATERALS 611 R.E. CERT. 2

ASTM D1785 FOR SCHEDULE 40 PIPE
CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN
VEHICLE DETECTOR 704 CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE FOR APPROVAL ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC
BY ENGINEER.

MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE ASSISTS IN SETUP AND

VIDEO DETECTOR 733 CONTRACTOR SUBMITS TWO COPIES OF DESIGN PROGRAMMING
CHARACTERISTICS BROCHURE ENGINEER APPROVAL - TRAFFIC

63
 November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, 2014

2014 STD
MATERIAL SPEC. MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZE CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS REMARKS
SECTION
206, 301, APPROVED BY MAT'LS DIV.
307, 308,
309, 400, ONE 1 GAL. [4 LITERS] SAMPLE PER NO SAMPLE IF PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY IS SOURCE.
WATER FOR SEEDING & CONCRETE
500, 600, PROJECT ANNUAL SAMPLE AT TIME OF CONCRETE PLANT INSPECTION.
SEEDING – 1 SAMPLE PER PROJECT PER SOURCE.
800 RE APPROVES IRRIGATION QUALITY WATER FOR SEEDING
WATERPROOFING 815 QPL1

WATERSTOP, PVC AND RUBBER 802 MFR. CERTIFIED TEST APPROVED BY MAT'LS. DIV.

WELDED SPLICES 503, 804 WELDER CERT. REQUIRED. APPROVED BY ENGINEER

MFR. CERTIFIED TEST & FABRICATOR'S CERT. APPROVED BY BRIDGE DIV. MAY BE GALVANIZED OR PAINTED. SEE
WELDED STEEL GRATES AND FRAMES 609 PAINT, MISCELLANEOUS IF FIELD PAINTED.
WELDER CERT. REQUIRED.

502, 503,
504, 507,
615, 701,
WELDED WIRE FABRIC SEE REINF. STEEL WIRE AND WIRE FABRIC
702, 711,
732, 804,
816, 822
609, 610,
WELDING MATERIALS 612, 617, QPL1
802, 807,
811

R.E. PERFORMS ACCEPTANCE SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

WHEELCHAIR RAMPS 641 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
CONCRETE. SEE ALSO TACTILE PANELS

QPL1 (MISC. IRON & STEEL, METAL CULVERT PIPE)

YARD DRAINS 609 SEE BACKFILL MATERIAL.
SEE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
GENERAL NOTES:

 THE RESIDENT ENGINEER AND CONTRACTOR CAN NOT USE SPLIT SAMPLES FOR ACCEPTANCE. ACCEPTANCE SAMPLE MUST BE SEPARATE SAMPLES.

 IF A MATERIAL IS NOT LISTED ON THIS GUIDE SCHEDULE, SUCH AS JOB SPECIAL PROVISION ITEMS, CONTACT THE MATERIALS DIVISION TO DETERMINE A SAMPLING/TESTING RATE.

 IF THERE IS A QUESTION CONCERNING THE QUALITY OF A MATERIAL/PRODUCT OR WHETHER A MATERIAL/PRODUCT MEETS SPECIFICATIONS, EVEN IF PROPERLY CERTIFIED OR FROM A QPL,
CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV. ABOUT TESTING OF THE MATERIAL/PRODUCT. SAMPLES MAY BE OBTAINED AT REQUEST OF MATERIAL’S DIVISION.

 NO SAMPLES ARE REQUIRED ON MATERIALS THAT ARE PRETESTED/INSPECTED BY MAT'LS. DIV. UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS SCHEDULE. PRETESTED MATERIAL WILL NORMALLY HAVE AN ARDOT SEAL,
TAG, OR MARKING. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE VALIDITY OR SOURCE OF THESE IDENTIFIERS, CONTACT MAT'LS. DIV.

 ALL STEEL ITEMS ARE SUBJECT TO RESTRICTIONS AS EXPLAINED IN SECTION 106.01 OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.

 FAILING TEST REPORTS ORIGINATING FROM THE MAT'LS. DIV. WILL BE RETURNED TO THE RESIDENT ENGINEER WITHOUT COMMENT AS TO THE FINAL DISPOSITION AND ACCEPTABILITY OF A MATERIAL
UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ACCEPTED BY THE CONSTRUCTION, ROADWAY DESIGN, AND/OR BRIDGE DESIGN DIVISIONS. THE RESIDENT ENGINEER SHOULD MAKE APPROPRIATE COMMENTS AND TRANSMIT THROUGH
THE DISTRICT ENGINEER TO THE CONSTRUCTION DIVISION. A COPY OF THE TEST REPORT SHOULD ACCOMPANY THESE COMMENTS. THE STATE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER WILL DETERMINE THE FINAL
DISPOSITION OF THE MATERIAL AFTER CONSIDERING THE COMMENTS OF THE RESIDENT ENGINEER AND THE DISTRICT ENGINEER, AND AFTER CONSULTING WITH THE MATERIALS ENGINEER.

 FOR FAILING FIELD TEST REPORTS OR OTHER MATERIAL IRREGULARITIES, REFER TO R. E. MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS.
NOTES:
1. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M196 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER REQUIREMENT
2. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M170 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATREIALS MODULE JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER REQUIREMENT.
3. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M170 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS NO ACTION REQUIRED.
4. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M40 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER.
5. FOR NON-SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS M41 REQUIRED. FOR SITEMANAGER MATERIALS MODULE JOBS REFER TO SITEMANAGER.

64
November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FOR 2014 STD. SPECS.

MATERIAL TYPE OF TESTS FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING

AGGREGATE BASE COURSE GRADATION, SUPPLIER ACCEPTANCE AND ARDOT VERIFICATION
LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTIC SAMPLING AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ARE THE SAME AS
LIMIT AND PERCENT MOISTURE. THOSE OUTLINED FOR CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS.
ALSO, DENSITY AND THICKNESS SUPPLIER CERTIFIES TEST RESULTS KEPT AT SUPPLIER’S
WHEN APPLICABLE. OFFICE.

VERIFICATION SAMPLES ARE NOT REQUIRED FOR

PROJECTS/SUPPLY CONTRACTS WITH LESS THAN 500 TONS
(400 CU.YD) [450 t (304 cu m)]. ALSO, VERIFICATION SAMPLES
ARE NOT REQUIRED WHEN SOURCE IS ROUTINELY
SUPPLYING AGGREGATE BASE COURSE ON ARDOT
CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS.

AGGREGATE: SURFACE TREATMENT GRADATION AND DECANTATION SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION. TEST RESULTS KEPT AT
SUPPLIER’S OFFICE.
ASPHALT BINDERS AND LIQUID ALL APPLICABLE MATERIAL FROM CERTIFIED SHIPPERS IS SAMPLED AT THE
ASPHALTS REQUEST OF MATERIALS DIVISION.
(CUTBACKS AND EMULSIONS
[EXCEPT RAPID UNTESTED OR UNIDENTIFIED MATERIAL, SEE NOTE 9.
SETTING])

ASPHALT, RAPID SETTING ALL APPLICABLE FOR MATERIAL FROM CERTIFIED SHIPPERS, ONE
EMULSIONS DESTINATION SAMPLE SHOULD BE SENT TO MATERIALS
(ANIONIC, DIVISION FOR EACH SPECIAL MAINTENANCE SEALING
CATIONIC, AND MODIFIED) PROJECT REQUIRING 20,000 GAL. [75,000 L] OR MORE.
NONE REQUIRED ON PROJECTS USING LESS THAN 20,000
GAL. [75,000 L]. ONE SAMPLE PER SUPPLY REQUISITION
FOR ALL OTHER ROUTINE MAINT. ACTIVITIES THAT REQUIRE
MORE THAN 6,000 GAL. [23,000 L] OF MATERIAL. ALSO, ONE
FIELD VISCOSITY SHOULD BE PERFORMED FOR EACH
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE SEALING PROJECT OR SUPPLY
REQUISITION THAT REQUIRES MORE THAN 6,000 GAL.
[23,000 L] OF MATERIAL.

UNTESTED OR UNIDENTIFIED MATERIAL, SEE NOTE 9.

65
November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FOR 2014 STD. SPECS.

MATERIAL TYPE OF TESTS FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING

ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT MIXTURES SUPPLIER MUST VERIFY MIX FOR SUPPLY CONTRACTS: SUPPLIER MUST BE ON THE
DESIGN AT START OF MIX QPL. SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION THAT ACCEPTANCE TEST
PRODUCTION OR AFTER AN RESULTS ARE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE PROPERTIES OF
INTERRUPTION OF MORE THAN 90 TABLE 410-1 (EXCEPT FOR DENSITY) REQUIRED FOR EACH
CALENDAR DAYS. SUPPLIER VOUCHER REGARDLESS OF THE QUANTITY OF MATERIAL.
TESTS EACH SUBLOT OF 750 TONS DEPARTMENT PERFORMS VERIFICATION TESTING ON
[750 t] FOR ASPHALT BINDER RANDOM BASIS.
CONTENT, AIR VOIDS, AND VMA;
DENSITY WHEN APPLICABLE. FOR OTHER HOT MIX CONTRACTS: SUPPLIER ACCEPTANCE
SUPPLIER MUST DETERMINE AND ARDOT ACCEPTANCE AND VERIFICATION SAMPLING
GRADATIONS FOR EVERY 750 AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ARE THE SAME AS THOSE
TONS OUTLINED FOR CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS. DEPARTMENT
[750 t] OF MIX FOR QUALITY TESTS ONE LOT SAMPLE TAKEN AT RANDOM FOR THE
CONTROL. PROPERTIES OF TABLE 410-1.

NO VERIFICATION SAMPLING AND TESTING

REQUIRED WHEN THE ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT MIX IS
BEING ROUTINELY USED ON ARDOT CONSTRUCTION
PROJECTS AND IS BEING SAMPLED/TESTED AT THE
REQUIRED FREQUENCY.

ASPHALT CONCRETE COLD PLANT GRADATION AND ASPHALT BINDER SAME REQUIREMENTS AS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE HOT
MIX CONTENT MIX. SUPPLIER RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING MIX
DESIGN. DISTRICT MATERIALS SUPERVISOR MUST REVIEW
NEW DESIGNS BEFORE THEY ARE USED.

PORTLAND CEMENT ALL APPLICABLE MATERIAL FROM CERTIFIED SHIPPERS ARE SAMPLED AT
THE REQUEST OF MATERIALS.

UNTESTED OR UNIDENTIFIED MATERIAL SHALL HAVE EACH

SHIPMENT ACCEPTANCE SAMPLED/TESTED BY MATERIALS
DIVISION BEFORE USE.

METRIC MINIMUM QUANTITIES ARE SHOWN IN BRACKETS, [ ].

66
November 2019

GUIDE SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FOR 2014 STD. SPECS.
MATERIAL TYPE OF TESTS FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING
READY MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT GRADATION, SLUMP, AIR MATERIAL MUST BE SUPPLIED FROM PLANT THAT HAS
CONCRETE CONTENT BEEN INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY ARDOT. ARDOT
(IF APPLICABLE) AND PERFORMS ALL ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH MATERIAL.

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 200 CU. YD. [152 cu m] OF CONCRETE

PER PURCHASE ORDER. NO SAMPLE REQUIRED FOR
PURCHASE ORDER LESS THAN 20 C.Y. [15 cu m]] OR WHEN
THE CONCRETE IS BEING ROUTINELY USED ON ARDOT
CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS AND IS BEING SAMPLED &
TESTED AT THE REQUIRED FREQUENCY

METRIC MINIMUM QUANTITIES ARE SHOWN IN BRACKETS, [ ].

NOTES:
1. THE FREQUENCIES OF SAMPLING LISTED ABOVE ARE CONSIDERED MINIMUM QUANTITIES.
2. NO SAMPLES REQUIRED ON MATERIALS PRETESTED /INSPECTED BY MATERIALS DIVISION UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS SCHEDULE. PRETESTED
MATERIALS WILL NORMALLY HAVE AN ARDOT SEAL, TAG, OR MARKING. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE VALIDITY OR SOURCE OF THESE
IDENTIFIERS CONTACT MATERIALS DIVISION

3. THE DISTRICT MAINTENANCE ENGINEER/SUPERINTENDENT WILL REVIEW AND APPROVE/REJECT ALL FIELD TEST RESULTS ON SAMPLES TESTED FOR
MAINTENANCE PROJECTS. THE TEST REPORTS ARE TO BE RETAINED AT THE DISTRICT OFFICE FOR A PERIOD OF 3 YEARS AFTER FINAL VOUCHER.

4. THE DISTRICT MAINTENANCE ENGINEER/SUPERINTENDENT WILL WRITE AND DISTRIBUTE THE FINAL MATERIALS CERTIFICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CHIEF ENGINEER’S MEMORANDUM.

5. THE DIST. MAT’LS SUPERVISOR WILL PROVIDE TEST REPORTS FOR THE DIST. MAINT. ENGR./SUPERINT. AND WILL PERFORM ADD’L TESTS AS DEEMED
NECESSARY BY THE DIST IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHIEF ENGINEER’S MEMORANDUM.

6. SMALL QUANTITIES OF MISCELLANEOUS MAT’LS MAY BE ACCEPTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHIEF ENGINEERS MEMORANDUM OF 2-7-97 AND MAINTENANCE
MEMORANDUM 97-1, BY THE DIST. MAINT. ENGR./SUPERINT. ON THE BASIS OF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING METHODS: (a) VISUAL EXAMINATION PROVIDED THE
SOURCE OF SUPPLY IS RELIABLE AND HAS RECENTLY FURNISHED SIMILAR MAT’L FOUND TO BE SATISFACTORY UNDER THE DEPARTMENT’S NORMAL
SAMPLING AND TESTING PROCEDURES; (2) CERTIFICATION BY THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER THAT THE MAT’L FURNISHED COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT
REQUIREMENTS; (c) VISUAL EXAMINATION AND THE DIST. MAINT. ENGINEER’S/SUPERINTENDENT’S CERTIFICATION THAT THE MAT’L HAS PERFORMED THE
FUNCTION INTENDED AND IS EITHER TEMPORARY OR EMERGENCY IN NATURE. THE APPROXIMATE MAX. QUANTITIES OF MAT’LS THAT MAY BE ACCEPTED
UNDER THE ABOVE METHODS ARE THE SAME AS THOSE OUTLINED IN THE RESIDENT ENGINEER’S MANUAL.

7. ANY FAILING MATERIALS OR MATERIALS IRREGULARITIES WILL BE HANDLED IN COMPLIANCE WITH DEPARTMENT POLICY.

8. DESTINATION SAMPLES TAKEN FROM CERTIFIED SUPPLIERS SHOULD BE USED FOR VERIFICATION ONLY.

9. FOR SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MATERIALS NOT LISTED IN THIS GUIDE, REFER TO THE GUIDE SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

METRIC MINIMUM QUANTITIES ARE SHOWN IN BRACKETS, [ ].

67
November 2019

SiteManager: Sample ID _ _____ _ _

Job No/s. ________________________Lab No. ________________
Additional Job Nos. ____________________________________
Material Source/Mfr./Supplier: _______________________________
Asphalt Mix Design Types ______________________________
Location: _________________________ Mfr.Lab No. ____________
Asphalt Mix Design No. _________________________________
Date Sampled: __________ Sample of: _______________________
Brand/Grade Asphalt __________________________________
Sample From: ___________________________Co. No.__________
Brand/Type Anti-Strip __________________________________
Quantity Represented: _____________Type Const.: _____________
(Do Not Use Job Qty.) Batch/Lot/Manuf. Nos. __________________________________
Tests Desired:_________________________ Std. Spec. No. ______ _____________________________________________________
Sampled By: _____________________ CTTP No.: ______________ Remarks: _____________________________________________
Submitted By: ____________________Attn: Mr/Ms ______________ _______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
01/2012__________________________________ QPL No._____
Note: See Sampling and Testing Manual for details.

SIZE SAMPLES REQUIRED

Concrete Aggregate: Cement - 10 Ibs.
Fine - 50 Ibs; Coarse - 200 Ibs. Lime - 5 Ibs
Base and Surface Course – 220 / 75 Ibs. Fly Ash - 5 Ibs. From: ________________________
Base Course (Max. Den) 200 Ibs. Water - 1 gal. Address: ________________________
Mineral Aggregate for D.B.S.T. - 35 Ibs. Paint - 1 qt.
Mineral Aggregate for ACHM Design: Reinforcing Bar - 4 ft. (2) ________________________
Coarse - 110 Ibs. Wire Mesh - Full Width x 5 ft.
Intermediate - 75 Ibs. Bar Supports - 1 each size ________________________
Fine - 30 Ibs. Barbed Wire - 6 ft.
Ledge Stone - 150 Ibs. Farm Fence - 6 ft. x ht.
(1 per 50 rolls; Max. Total 7) Materials Division
Soil - 10 Ibs; Proctor - 200 Ibs. Chain Link Fabric - 6 ft. x ht. ARKANSAS HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT
Asphalt: Cutback - 1 qt. (1 per 50 rolls; Min. 2 11301 WEST BASELINE
except when less than 10 rolls, only 1) LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72209
Asphalt Cement - 1 qt. Smooth Wire - 6 ft.
Emulsion - 1 gal. Metal Posts & Rail-1 ea. size per 500.
Guard Cable - 2-6 ft.
BAG ________ of ________ Bags

68
November 2019

ARDOT 1

SAMPLING

Policy Regarding Sampling and Testing Materials for the Benefit of Others.

1. All material samples shall be taken by or under the observation and direction of a
state inspector and submitted to the laboratory by state forces in the proper
manner.

2. No samples shall be submitted by or for individual contracting firms as part of their

materials exploration prior to award of contract.

3. We will assist the contractors or others in determining the quality of materials for
projects under contract; however, field forces should exercise discretion in
determining the amount of sampling and testing necessary to locate suitable
materials for a specific project.

4. A test report is indicative of the properties of the sample tested. If the sample is
not representative of the material being sampled, tests will fail to serve their
intended purpose and may be misleading.

5. Sample before materials are mixed with on-hand materials.

6. Under no circumstances is material to be sampled by anyone other than an

authorized representative of the Arkansas Department of Transportation when the
results of tests on such samples are to be the basis of acceptance or rejection of
the material.

7. Frequency of sampling should be in accordance with the current Guide Schedule

for Desired Minimum Frequency of Sampling and Testing for Job Control.

69
November 2019

ARDOT 2

Sample Sizes
Minimum Weight of Sample
Type of Material to be submitted

Fine Aggregate for Concrete 50 lbs (25 kg)

Coarse Aggregate for Concrete 200 lbs (95 kg)

Base Course Material (Classes 1-3) 220 lbs (100 kg)

Base (Classes 4-8) and Surface Course Material 75 lbs (35 kg)

Base Course for Maximum Density Tests 200 lbs (95 kg)

Mineral Aggregate for Bituminous Surface Treatment 50 lbs (25 kg)

Mineral Aggregate for Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix Design

Coarse(Including OGABC, Cl. III) 110 lbs (50 kg)
Intermediate 75 lbs (35 kg)
Fine 30 lbs (15 kg)
OGABC, Cl. I 275 lbs (125 kg)
OGABC, Cl. II 165 lbs (75 kg)

Ledge Stone 150 lbs (70 kg) in

pieces 6" to 8"
(150 mm to 200 mm)

Soil for Maximum Density Tests

Substantially all passing No. 4 sieve 35 lbs (15 kg)
(4.75mm sieve)
10% or more retained on No. 4 sieve 200 lbs (95 kg)
(4.75mm sieve)
Soil for gradation, liquid and plastic limits,
PI and group index
Substantially all passing No. 4 sieve 10 lbs (5 kg)
10% or more retained on No. 4 sieve 50 lbs (25 kg)
Soil for Portland Cement Stabilization
Substantially all passing No. 4 sieve 250 lbs (115 kg)
10% or more retained on No. 4 sieve 500 lbs (230 kg)

70
November 2019

Soil for Lime Stabilization

Substantially all passing No. 4 sieve 50 lbs (25 kg)
10% or more retained on No. 4 sieve 150 lbs (70 kg)

Gravel or Stone for Portland Cement Stabilization 500 lbs (225 kg)

Asphaltic Materials
Cutback 1 qt (1 l)
Asphalt Binder 1 qt (1 l)
Emulsified Asphalt 1 gal (4 l)

Bituminous Mixture

Nominal Max. Min. Weight, Min. Size (Area) Min. Weight

Particle Size Uncompacted Compacted of Test
Sample, lbs. Sample, Sq. In. Specimen, grams
#4 (4.75mm) 4 lb (2 kg) 36 Sq.In. (23,250 sq mm) 500
3/8" (9.5mm) 8 lb (4 kg) 36 Sq.In. (23,250 sq mm) 1000
l/2" (12.5mm) 12 lb (6 kg) 60 Sq.In. (39,000 sq mm) 1500
3/4" (19 mm) 16 lb (8 kg) 100 Sq.In. (64,500 sq mm) 2000
l" (25 mm) 20 lb (10 kg) 144 Sq.In. (93,000 sq mm) 3000
1 l/2" (37.5mm) 25 lb (12 kg) 144 Sq.In. (93,000 sq mm) 4000

Asphalt density sample cores - Diameter of the sample should be at least equal to
four times the maximum size of the aggregate and the thickness should be one-
and-one-half (1½) times the maximum size of the aggregate.

Water 1 gal (4 l)

ARDOT 30
71
November 2019

SAMPLING SOILS

Soils may be sampled by means of hand augers, post hole augers, power drill augers,
shovels, other suitable hand tools or any other equipment which provides a
representative portion of the layer being sampled.

When borrow pits will be used to obtain special or upgraded embankment material or
selected material, the pit area must be adequately sampled prior to excavation. The
drilling and sampling should be done far enough in advance of the planned excavation
to permit the samples to be tested and analysis made of the information to determine
whether or not the pit is suitable for use.

The test holes should be located so as to enclose an area of known depth and quality of
material. It is not necessary for the holes to be located on a rectangular grid system with
uniform spacing. Holes may enclose areas with regular or variable shapes such as
triangles, rectangles or polygons with unequal sides. A minimum of three holes is
necessary to enclose an area.

Sampling of test holes should begin at the surface and a sample taken of each
different layer of soil encountered in the test hole. Each sample should be placed in
a suitable container (doubled heavy paper bags, etc. Unlined cloth bags should not be
used.) and properly identified.

Identification should include job number, pit name, hole name, hole number or station
number, depth represented and type material (special embankment,SM-2,etc.) It is
recommended that notes of the sampling be kept in a field notebook for future
reference. Information recorded should include the usual job information (number,
name, etc.) pit name, pit location and a log for each test hole with sampling depths
and pertinent comments regarding different strata of materials encountered,
underground water, presence of rock or boulders or any other information that would
assist in working the pit.

A neat and reasonably accurate sketch of the pit with test hole locations and
identification should be made and a copy submitted to the central materials laboratory
with the samples. Test hole locations should be referenced to fences, trees or
other landmarks which can be used to re-establish the location of the test holes. One
copy of the sketch should be filed in the project records for future use.

Areas to be seeded or to produce sod mulch should be sampled in accordance with the
governing specifications. This requires the submission of only one sample for each
major soil area obtained by the combining of the samples taken at the rate of three per
acre. Samples should be submitted to the Materials Division for determination of lime
requirement.
ARDOT 35 -18

72
November 2019

METHOD OF SAMPLING STONE, GRAVEL AND SAND

FOR USE AS HIGHWAY MATERIALS

1. SCOPE
1.1 These methods are to provide procedures for sampling of stone, gravel and sand
for the following purposes:
Preliminary investigations of sources of supply, acceptance or rejection of
source of supply, inspection of shipments of materials, and inspection of
materials on the job site.

2. SECURING SAMPLES
2.1 Samples of all materials for testing shall be taken by the Engineer or an
authorized representative.
2.2 Sampling is as important as the testing and the sampler shall be very careful to
obtain samples that will show the true nature and condition of the materials which
they represent.

3. STONE FROM LEDGES OR QUARRIES

3.1 The ledge or quarry face shall be inspected to determine visual variations in
different layers. Differences in color, texture and structure should be observed.
3.2 Sampling and Size of Sample:
3.2.1 Separate samples of each different strata shall be obtained.

4. SAND, GRAVEL AND CRUSHED STONE

4.1 If samples of sand or gravel are desired from an unworked deposit, test holes
should be dug or drilled and the excavated material sampled. Test holes should
be spaced at sufficient locations to determine the quality of the material and
the extent of the deposit. The number and depth of test holes will depend on the
quantity of material needed, the topography of the area, nature of the deposit, the
character of the material, and the value of the resultant product. If visual
inspection indicates considerable variation in the material, individual samples shall
be selected to represent each strata or variable section of the deposit.

4.2 If the face of an open pit is to be sampled, the sample shall be taken by
channeling the face vertically, bottom to top, so that it will be representative of
the material proposed to be used. Overburden material should not be included
in the sample.

73
November 2019

4.3 In sampling material from stockpiles it is very difficult to insure representative

samples are obtained due to the segregation that occurs when material is
stockpiled, with the coarser particles rolling to the outside base of the pile. When
it is necessary to sample stockpiles, the assistance of power equipment such as
front end loaders, back hoes, etc. should be used if available to expose the
material at various levels and locations. These sampling locations should be in
the working face of the stockpile if the stockpile is in active use. Whether in an
active working face or not, the outer surface should be scraped away sufficiently
to reach into an area not impacted by recent rains, etc. Bucket loads are to be
obtained from the bottom to the top of the pile at several locations (minimum of
three locations) and dumped in a clean area to develop one combined, yet a
separate, small sampling pile. This sampling pile is to be thoroughly stirred or
mixed to insure it represents the stockpile as a whole. Then, the sampling pile is
leveled by “back dragging” with the power equipment. The sample is then
obtained by taking specimens diagonally across this material. As a minimum,
specimens are taken from near on edge of the material, in the center of the
material, and near the opposite edge of the material. The specimens are then
combined into one sample. Without equipment, sampling is more difficult. Take
three or more samples from different locations and elevations of the stockpile.
The locations should be selected randomly, the outer surface scraped away and
taken from within the interior of the stockpile..
A helpful hint is to use a board just above the point to be sampled. This is
to prevent segregated material from falling into the sample. A shelf is excavated
below the board and the material is discarded. The sample is taken from the
undisturbed material. The samples from several locations should be combined
and mixed as the representative sample of the stockpile. Sampling stockpiles of
sand or fine aggregate is not as difficult since sand has less of a tendency to
segregate as much as coarse aggregate. Because there may be variability, you
must take samples from several points (minimum of three) throughout the pile.
Remove the dry surface sand and take the sample from the damp sand
underneath. Sampling tubes approximately 31.8 mm by 1830 mm (1 1/4 in by 6
ft.) minimum) may be used. Insert at a minimum of five random locations to get a
combined sample.
4.4
Samples from conveyor belts will be taken by stopping the belt and removing
from three locations the entire cross-section of the material. Collect all the
material in the sample including the fines. Another method that can be used is to
pass a suitable container through the entire discharge stream (a minimum of
three passes should be made to secure the size sample desired).
4.5
Samples from the roadway should be obtained from three random locations.
Each of the three samples should include approximately the same amount of
material. Samples should be taken to the full depth of the material(take care to
exclude underlying material).

ARDOT 40
74
November 2019

SAMPLING BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

Bituminous materials may be sampled by any one of several satisfactory methods

as long as a representative, uncontaminated sample is obtained. Immediately after
sampling, the bituminous material should be placed in a clean container and
immediately covered. The Materials Division will furnish containers for this purpose
upon request. All samples should be completely identified as to source, grade,
original tank number, laboratory number and date sample taken.

Tank transports may be sampled from a spigot, from the discharge line or other
satisfactory methods. The sample should not be taken until approximately two gallons
have been allowed to pass through the sampling spigot or the discharge line.

Bulk storage tanks and asphalt distributors should be sampled by lowering a suitable
container fitted with a stopper or cover into the material. After the container has been
lowered to the desired depth, the stopper or cover shall be removed by means of an
attached string, wire or rod and the container allowed to fill. The sample should be
obtained from at least one foot below the surface of the material. Suitable sampling
spigots may be used if provided on storage tanks or distributors.

Asphalt cement and these materials are accepted by certification acceptance unless the
source is unreliable or uncertified. In that instance, testing of the material will be
required before it is used.

The District Materials Supervisors will pick up random samples of liquid asphalts and
asphalt cements from the refineries or plants in his assigned area to assure that
specification material is being shipped. Destination samples should be picked up
in accordance with the "Manual of Field Sampling and Testing Procedures" Guide
Schedule of Desired Minimum Frequency for Acceptance Sampling and Testing.
Tests should be run immediately on any loads that are suspect. Asphalt cements
and liquid asphalts are to be sent to the Materials Division for a complete analysis.
Viscosity tests on emulsified asphalts are also to be run in the District laboratory with a
copy of the report going to appropriate job supervisor, to Materials Division, to District
Engineers and to Construction and Maintenance Engineer.

The following is the procedure to be followed in sampling and testing:

A. Asphalt Cements

1. Use only new clean metal double friction-top cans.

2. Containers shall not be washed, rinsed or wiped with an oily cloth. If they
are not clean, they will not be used.
3. Obtain at least a 1 quart. (1 liter) sample. Care must be taken to assure that
the samples are representative.

75
November 2019

4. Clean outside of container with a clean, dry cloth.

5. With a felt tip pen or other suitable marker, identify each sample container with
the usual information as indicated on sample identification card M-401. In
addition, be sure to include carrier, trailer number, laboratory number, and date
sample taken.
B. Cutback Asphalts
1. Use only new clean metal can with screw-on lids or double friction-top cans.
2. Containers shall not be washed, rinsed or wiped with an oily cloth. If they are
not clean, they will not be used.
3. Obtain 1 quart. (1 liter) sample. Care must be taken to assure that the
samples are representative.
4. Clean outside of container with clean, dry cloth.
5. With a felt tip pen or other suitable marker, identify each sample container with
the usual information as indicated on sample identification card M-401. In
addition, be sure to include carrier, trailer number, laboratory number, and date
sample taken.
C. Emulsified Asphalt
1. Use only new plastic jugs for sample containers.
2. Never clean or rinse jugs with a petroleum solvent or other liquid.
3. Obtain two 4 liter (1-gallon) samples from transport tanker after second
distributor load has been transferred.
4. Samples shall be taken from transfer hose but should be taken as soon as
pump has been stopped. Extreme care must be taken to assure that the
samples are representative.
5. A clean funnel should be used to assist in filling jugs.
6. Fill jugs completely full and seal immediately.
7. The sample containers shall not be submerged in solvent, nor shall they be
wiped with a solvent saturated cloth. Any spilled material on the outside of the
containers shall be wiped with a clean, dry cloth immediately after sealing.
8. With a felt tip pen or other suitable marker, identify each sample container with
the usual information as indicated on sample identification card M-401. In
addition, be sure to include carrier, trailer number, laboratory number, and date
sample taken.
9. Transport one sample to Materials Division immediately for complete analysis.
Transport the other sample to the District lab and test for viscosity. Care should
be taken to avoid exposure to sunlight, heat and excessive shaking during
transportation. Testing in the District lab should be done the same day as
sampling.
10. If viscosity is within the specification limits, the material is acceptable. If
outside the specified range, rerun the test on the one-gallon sample. If the
viscosity for CRS-2, CRS-2P or CRS-2L still exceeds 500 seconds, repeat the
test at 71ºC (160ºF) degrees. The viscosity at 71ºC (160ºF) shall be within the
limits of 90 - 200 seconds. Acceptance or rejection will be based on the best of
the results.
11. Notify Materials Division immediately of any failures to allow detection and
correction of possible problems.
ARDOT 50

76
November 2019

SAMPLING PORTLAND CEMENT,

HYDRATED LIME AND MINERAL FILLER

These materials may be sampled in any manner in which a representative,

uncontaminated" sample can be obtained. Samples should be packaged in plastic
lined cloth bags provided by the Materials Division or 4 liter (1 gallon) friction top cans.

Each sample should be properly identified by filling out and attaching card form M -
401.

Samples should weigh approximately 5 kg (10 lb).

On job where hydrated lime is used to treat subgrade soils, one sample should be
submitted to the central laboratory for each 250 tons delivered. Special care should be
taken so as not to obtain a sample contaminated with subgrade material.

77
November 2019

ARDOT 51

SAMPLING WATER

When water is to be used from a source such as lakes, streams or borrow pits,
samples shall be taken from the vicinity of the suction inlet to the pump.

Samples should contain approximately 4 liters (1 gallon) and be placed in a clean plastic
bottle with a lid which provides a positive seal.

Water obtained from a municipal water supply does not require sampling.

78
November 2019

ARDOT 52

METHOD OF SAMPLING FRESH CONCRETE

1. SCOPE

1.1 This method describes the procedures for obtaining representative

samples of fresh concrete as delivered to the project on which tests are to
be performed to determine compliance with quality requirements of the
specifications.

2. PROCEDURE

2.1 Samples obtained for strength tests should have a volume of at least 1
cubic foot. Smaller samples are permitted for air content and slump tests
with the size being sufficient to provide for testing a representative sample.
2.2 Sampling procedures should include the use of every precaution to assure
that the samples will truly represent the nature and condition of the
concrete sampled.
2.3 Where possible to do so, the concrete should be sampled at two or more
regularly spaced intervals during discharge of the middle portion of the
batch with the portions being combined for test purposes. Perform the
sampling by passing a receptacle completely through the discharge stream
or by completely diverting the discharge into a sample container.
2.4 Paving concrete may be sampled after discharge onto the prepared base
course. Portions should be obtained from four-five different locations in
the batch dump and combined into a sample for testing.
2.5 Sampling should not be done during the very first or last portions of a
batch. In the case of revolving drum truck mixers, do not obtain samples
until after all of the water has been added to the mixer.

79
November 2019

ARDOT 52

3. PRECAUTIONS

3.1 The elapsed time between obtaining the first and last portions of the
composite samples shall be as short as possible, but in no instance should
it exceed 15 min.
3.2 The individual samples shall be transported to the place where fresh
concrete tests are to be performed or where test specimens are to be
molded. They shall then be combined and remixed with a shovel the
minimum amount necessary to insure uniformity.
3.3 Tests for slump or air content shall be started within 5 minutes after the
sampling is completed. These tests should be completed as expeditiously
as possible. Molding of specimens for strength tests shall be started within
15 minutes after the composite sample has been fabricated. The elapsed
time between obtaining and using the sample shall be as short as possible
and the sample should be protected from the sun, wind and other sources
of rapid evaporation and any other contaminating elements.

80
November 2019

ARDOT 55

SAMPLING REINFORCING AND MISCELLANEOUS STEELS*

REINFORCING BARS. Samples 48 inches long shall be cut from each size bar from
each producer. Lengths or pieces less than 48 inches cannot be tested.

WIRE MESH. Cut samples approximately five feet by width from each type of mesh.

SEVEN WIRE STRAND FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE. One sample shall be

taken from one end of each reel or coil. The length of sample shall be
approximately six (6) feet.
Chemical and physical test results shall be furnished for each shipment by the
manufacturer and forwarded to the Materials Division with the samples.

SAMPLING SPAN WIRE AND GUY WIRE. Two samples shall be taken from one end of
each reel or coil. The length of the samples shall be approximately 6 feet.

BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS. Two complete units should be sampled at random
from each size and or lot furnished.

CHAIRS AND BAR SUPPORTS. Chairs and bar supports with galvanized,
plastic coated or stainless steel feet should have one sample submitted for
each size furnished. (These may approved and certified by Resident
Engineer).

* All samples must be tagged with the appropriate information.

81
November 2019

ARDOT 56

SAMPLING PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER,

NON-EXTRUDING AND RESILIENT TYPES

Preformed expansion joint fillers shall be sampled to provide a 3 sq ft (0.4 sq

m) sample for each thickness. One representative sample shall be selected
from each shipment of 1,000 square feet or any fraction thereof of each
thickness ordered. Samples shall be packaged for transportation in such a
manner that there will be no danger of distortion or breakage.

Samples of self-expanding cork, in addition to the above, shall be kept dry as

received and wrapped for transportation in a manner that will prevent the
entrance of moisture.

82
November 2019

ARDOT 60

SAMPLING GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

Geotextile fabric materials shall be sampled at the rate of one sample per shipment.
The samples shall be cut from one randomly selected roll and shall contain a minimum
of 3 sq yd(3 sq m) of material cut across the full width of the roll.

83
November 2019

ARDOT 62

SAMPLING PREFORMED PLASTIC UNDERDRAIN

Preformed plastic underdrain pipe shall be sampled at the rate of three samples, each at
least 6.5 feet (2 m) in length, selected at random from each shipment to the job site or
one set of three samples per each 25,000 ft (7620 m) of pipe or part thereof if a
shipment exceeds this amount.

84
November 2019

ARDOT 63

SAMPLING FENCING MATERIALS

BARBED WIRE. A sample shall be taken at random for each 50 rolls and shall be
approximately 2 m (6 ft) in length.

FARM FENCE. A sample shall be taken at random from each 50 rolls or fraction thereof,
in a lot or a total of seven rolls, whichever is less. A lot shall consist of rolls of a single
design, grade, coating type or class offered for inspection. Samples shall
be approximately 6 ft (2 m) in length and shall extend the full width of the roll.

CHAIN LINK FENCE. A fabric sample shall be taken at random for each 50 rolls;
however, in no case shall fewer than two (2) rolls from the entire quantity offered for
inspection be sampled, except when the entire quantity offered for inspection is fewer
than 10 rolls; then only one roll shall be sampled.
Samples shall be approximately 6 ft (2 m) in length and shall extend full width
of the roll.

SMOOTH WIRE FOR BRACING. A sample shall be taken for each 50 rolls at
random.
Samples shall be approximately 2 m (6 ft) in length.

METAL POSTS AND ACCESSORIES. Posts and accessories shall be sampled at

random.
One sample shall be taken of each post or accessory from each shipment of 500
pieces or less for the same shape offered for inspection.

CLASS C AND D FENCE MATERIALS. Wire and hardware used to construct

Class C and D fence may be accepted and certified by the Resident Engineer.
85
November 2019

ARDOT 64

SAMPLING WOODEN PRESSURED TREATED FENCE POSTS

The following procedure shall be used in obtaining core samples of wooden posts:

Wooden fence posts shall be sampled using a calibrated increment borer at the
rate of one sample of 20 wood cores minimum per treatment charge.,
(or portion thereof) or per shipment, of each type preservative treatment
(creosote, pentachlorophenol, or chromate copper arsenate).
No cores required if job has less than 50 posts.
The cores shall represent a random sample of all sizes of posts well distributed
throughout the charge and shall be representative of the size mix in the charge.
Only one core may be taken per post.

Cores are to be taken from the approximate longitudinal midpoint of the post and
shall be drilled to the center of the post and at a right angle to the length of the
post. Cores shall be a minimum of 2.0 inches in length. Cores containing cracks,
knots or an internal defect, or crushed, broken or smeared with treating solution
shall be discarded and not counted toward required 20 cores.
Care should be taken to avoid nails and staples if samples are obtained from
installed posts.

Samples should be handled carefully to preserve the integrity of the core, and
shall be placed in a suitable sealed container for transport to Materials Division.
Containers may be obtained from the Materials Division. Cores should be
marked in such a manner that the proper orientation may be determined. The
serial number of the increment borer shall be indicated on the sample card, to
allow for use of the borer’s core diameter in the assay. If this has not been
determined or the borer has been sharpened, contact the Materials Division
86
November 2019

Central Laboratory to allow for determination. Core diameter should be accurately

determined to the nearest 0.001 inch.
Should the increment borer require maintenance and/or sharpening, it should
be sent to the Materials Division Equipment Section Recalibration is required
after any major maintenance or sharpening. Arrangements may be made by the
post or timber supplier for presampling and testing by contacting the Materials
Division.

Materials Division will then assign the appropriate DMS or Central Office
personnel to perform the Post Yard sampling. When pre-testing is performed,
the posts may be accepted by the Resident Engineer on the basis of the
shipment being tagged with ARDOT identifying tags and telephone
verification of the test results from Materials Division. Test reports will then be
forwarded if not received by the Resident Engineer prior to receiving the
shipment of posts on the job.

87
November 2019

ARDOT 65

BITUMINOUS COATED CULVERT METAL PIPE(BCCM)

BCCM is accepted on Manufacturer's Certification (See Qualified Products

List). When deemed necessary by the Materials Engineer, samples shall be
taken for testing.
Thickness measurements are to be made in the field to determine compliance
with the governing specifications which require a minimum thickness of
coating of 0.05 inch measured on the crests of the corrugations. This
requirement applies to both inside and outside of the pipe. Gages for this
measurement are furnished by Materials Division.
Documentation of coating measurements should be recorded in the drainage
books. Rejected material shall be noted in the job diary and marked REJECT".
After all BCCM pipe has been checked and used on the job the Resident
Engineer shall certify, in writing, to the of Materials Engineer that the asphalt
coating on all BCCM pipe incorporated into the job was checked and found to
comply with the specifications.

88
November 2019

ARDOT 71

SAMPLING GLASS BEADS

Glass beads for reflectorization shall be sampled at the rate of three 50 lb. (23
kg) bags for each lot of 10,000 lbs. (45 Kg) or less. Every effort should be made
to determine the lot number. Where lot numbers are not readily located or are
not practical for other reasons, the beads should be sampled randomly at the
rate of three bags per truckload or shipment. If sampling from bulk containers,
contact the Materials Division for assist, as sampling this type of container
requires utilization of a special sample probe.

89
November 2019

ARDOT 75

SAMPLING THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC LINE MATERIAL

Yellow and white thermoplastic material shall be randomly sampled at the rate of
three 50 lb. (23 kg) bags for each lot of 40,000 lbs (18,000 Kg) or less. Every
effort should be made to determine the lot number. Where lot numbers are not
readily located or are not practical for other reasons, the thermoplastic should be
sampled randomly at the rate of three bags per truckload or shipment.

NOTE: Care should be taken not to expose the sample to extreme heat.

90
November 2019

ARDOT 82

SAMPLING MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Materials in rolls such as treated cotton fabric, cotton duck, roll roofing, asphalt felt
and jute matting shall be sampled from the full width of a roll taken at random
from the shipment or lot. The first foot (1 meter) of the roll shall be discarded and
both ends of the sample shall be cut squarely across the strip. The sample shall
be approximately 4 ft (1.5 m) in length.

Premolded joint filler shall be sampled at random and approximately 3 sq.ft. (0.3
sq m) should be included in the sample.
Preformed plastic gaskets for concrete pipe joints shall be sampled at the
request of the Materials Division.

91
November 2019

ARDOT 84

SAMPLING BOILED LINSEED OIL

Boiled linseed oil shall be sampled at the rate of one sample per lot/batch number.
Secure a 1 gallon (4 liter) representative undiluted sample from one or more
containers. (Sample should not contain mineral spirits).

92
November 2019

ARDOT 85

SAMPLING PAINT
Some paints may be approved prior to shipment to the job and may be used if
properly identified and documented. All paints that cannot be properly identified
as approved must be sampled and tested prior to use. Samples of paint shall be
submitted to the Materials Division at least two weeks prior to intended use.
When paint is shipped in smaller quantity containers, the Engineer may
randomly select one container from each Lot or Batch for each type of paint and
submit the container to the Central Laboratory. On multiple component paints, a
container of each component shall be submitted. When practical upon completion
of testing, Materials Division personnel will arrange to return the remaining
useable portion to the job.
Paint which is shipped in large containers will be sampled by Materials
Division laboratory personnel at the approved storage site at or near the job. The
Engineer shall make arrangements with the Materials Division for the sampling.
The Engineer shall record the lot or batch number/s of the paint and the quantity.
If mixing is required, site selected will have access to 110 volt commercial electric
power to be provided by the Contractor. In lieu of commercial electric power, the
Contractor may provide a suitable 110 volt portable generator.
All paint shall be thoroughly mixed to a homogeneous condition with
special care being taken to re-incorporate all settled pigment from the bottom of
the container. When possible, continuous mixing with a power-driven stirrer shall
be maintained prior to sampling and throughout the sampling process to prevent
pigment separation. Following sampling of waterborne paints, a light layer of
distilled water should be placed over the paint surface of sampled container after
sampling to minimize potential skinning.
The minimum size sample for all paints is one liter (one quart) for each lot
or each batch represented. Each sample shall be properly identified by the
Manufacturer's name, lot number, batch number, quantity, and type of paint.
Copies of any certifications included with the paint shall be submitted.
93
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 302-09

Test Method for Deleterious Matter

in Aggregate
________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method provides a procedure for determining the percentage, by
weight, of deleterious material contained in aggregate.

2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 M 92 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
 M 231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials
 T 2 Sampling of Aggregates
 T 248 Reducing Sample of Aggregate to Testing Size
________________________________________________________________
3. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE

3.1 This test method is of primary significance in determining the acceptability of

aggregate for use in Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix and Portland Cement
Concrete.
________________________________________________________________
4. APPARATUS

4.1 Balance - The balance shall have sufficient capacity, be readable to 0.1
percent of the sample mass, or better, and conform to the requirements of
M 231.

4.2 Sieves - Sieves conforming to M 92.

4.3 Hot Plate or Oven - An oven providing free circulation of air and capable of
maintaining a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C).

4.4 Scratching Surface – Shall consist of a Non-glazed ceramic streak plate or

mortar bowl.
94
November 2019

________________________________________________________________
5. PROCEDURE

5.1 Obtain a representative sample of the aggregate in accordance with

AASHTO T 2 and T 248 in order to obtain a final weight after sieving as
specified in Table 1 of Section 5.3.

5.2 Dry the sample to constant mass at a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C),
allow to cool, and determine the mass of it to the nearest 0.1 percent of the
total original dry sample mass.

5.3 Sieve the dried test sample over the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve in such a manner
as to avoid breaking up any clay lumps which might be present. Obtain the
weight of aggregate particles retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve and
record as the total weight of the test sample. Discard the portion of material
passing the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.

5.3.1 The weight of the sample, after sieving, should be in accordance with the
following table:

______________________________________________________
Size of Particles Weight of Sample
in Sample Grams
________________________________________________
No. 4 to 3/8” 500
(4.75mm to 9.5mm)
No. 4 to 1/2" 2000
(4.75 mm to 12.5 mm)
No. 4 to 3/4” 3000
(4.75 mm to 19 mm)
No. 4 to 1 1/2" 9000
(4.75 mm to 37.5 mm)
________________________________________________

5.4 Spread the aggregate sample (portion retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm)
sieve) out on a large sheet of heavy paper on a work table so that the
individual particles can be carefully examined.

5.5 By visual and physical classification, separate each type of deleterious

matter such as clay lumps, slate, shale, friable particles, etc. from the
remainder of the sample. Any particles which can be broken into finely
divided particles with the fingers shall be classified as friable particles. A
particle shall be counted as deleterious shale if it (1) consists of 100 percent
shale, (2) has shale adhering to it which visually comprises 50 percent or

95
November 2019

more of the particle or (3) has shale within it which visually comprises 50
percent or more of the particle. Slate and shale can be identified by
scratching against the non-glazed area of a mortar bowl or streak plate. A
fragment of slate or shale will leave a colored mark on the surface of the
mortar bowl or streak plate.

5.6 Obtain the weight of objectionable material removed from aggregate sample.

________________________________________________________________
6. CALCULATION

6.1 The percentage of the deleterious matter present shall be calculated to the
nearest 0.1 percent by dividing the weight of deleterious material by the
weight of the total sample (portion retained on No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve) and
multiplying by 100.

C = (A / B) X 100

where:
A = weight of deleterious material

B = weight of total sample (portion retained on No. 4 4.75 mm

sieve)

C = percentage of the deleterious matter

96
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 304-07

Test Method for Crushed Particles in Aggregate

______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method provides a procedure for determination of percentage of

crushed particles in aggregate.

______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 M92 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
 M231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials
 T2 Sampling of Aggregates
 T248 Reducing Sample of Aggregate to Testing Size

______________________________________________________________________
3. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE

3.1 This test method is of primary significance in determining the acceptability

of aggregate for use in meeting the requirements of Section 303 of the
Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

______________________________________________________________________
4. APPARATUS

4.1 Balance - The balance shall have sufficient capacity, be readable to 0.1
percent of the sample mass, or better, and conform to the requirements of
M 231.

4.2 Sieves - Sieves conforming to M 92.

4.3 Hot Plate or Oven - An oven providing free circulation of air and
capable of maintaining a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C).

97
November 2019

5. PROCEDURE

5.1 Obtain a representative sample of the aggregate in accordance with

AASHTO T 2 and T 248 in order to obtain a final weight after sieving as
specified in Table 1 of Section 5.3.1.

5.2 Dry the sample to constant mass at a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C),
allow to cool, and determine the mass of it to the nearest 0.1 percent of the
total original dry sample mass.

5.3 The sample shall be sieved over the Number (4.75mm), as specified, and
the test performed on the coarse fraction retained on the respective sieve.
A representative sample shall be selected by quartering or splitting so as to
obtain, after sieving, weights conforming to Table 1 of 5.3.1.

5.3.1 Table 1
_______________________________________________________
Size of Particles Weight of Sample, grams
__________________________________________________________________
No. 4 (4.75mm) to 1/2" (12.5mm) 500

No. 4 (4.75mm) to 3/4" (19.0mm) 1000

No. 4 (4.75mm) to 1 1/2" (37.5mm) 1500

_______________________________________________________

5.4 Weigh the representative sample obtained in 5.3.

5.5 The representative sample shall be spread in a thin layer on the bottom of
a large container or on a large sheet of heavy paper. The particles with
crushed faces shall be separated from those having no crushed faces.

______________________________________________________________________
6. CALCULATION

6.1 The particles with crushed faces shall be weighed.

6.2 The percentage of crushed particles present shall be calculated to the

nearest 0.1 percent by dividing the weight of crushed face particles by the
weight of the total sample (portion retained on No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve), and
multiplying by 100.

C = (A / B) X 100
where:
A = weight of crushed face particles
B = weight of total sample [portion retained on No. 4 (4.75mm)
sieve]
C = percentage of crushed particles (Round to nearest whole
number)

98
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 306-07

Test Method for Total Insoluble Residue in Coarse

Aggregate
______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

This method is intended for the determination of acid insoluble material

in coarse aggregates.
________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Standards:
 M92 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
 M231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials
 T2 Sampling of Aggregates
 T248 Reducing Sample of Aggregate to Testing Size

______________________________________________________________________
3. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE

3.1 This test method is of primary significance in determining the

acceptability of aggregate for use in meeting the requirements of Section
409 of the Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

______________________________________________________________________
4. APPARATUS

4.1 Balance - The balance shall have sufficient capacity, be readable to 0.1
percent of the sample mass, or better, and conform to the requirements of
M 231.

4.2 Sieves - Sieves conforming to M 92.

4.3 Hot Plate or Oven - An oven providing free circulation of air and
capable of maintaining a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C).

4.4 800 mL Pyrex beaker.

4.5 Watch Glass (Pyrex)

99
November 2019

______________________________________________________________________
5. MATERIALS

5.1 Reagent Grade Hydrochloric Acid

______________________________________________________________________
6. PROCEDURE
6.1 Obtain a representative sample of the aggregate in accordance with
AASHTO T 2 and T 248.

6.2Dry the sample to constant mass at a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C),
allow to cool, and determine the mass of it to the nearest 0.1 percent of the
total original dry sample mass.

6.3 The sample shall be sieved over the 3/4 in. (19.0mm) and No. 8 (2.36mm)
sieve in order to obtain a final weight after sieving of approximately 200
grams. The test shall be performed on the coarse fraction retained on the
No. 8 (2.36mm) sieve.

6.4 A representative sample shall be selected by quartering or splitting so as to

obtain, after sieving, a weight of 200 grams. Determine the sample mass to
the accuracy specified in Section 4.1.
6.5 Place weighed sample into labeled 800 ml beaker.

6.6 Add 500 ml of 1:1 Hydrochloric Acid; cover with watch glass.

6.7 Bring to boil, and boil for 1 hr. If reaction not complete, repeat 6.6 - 6.7.

6.8 Remove from heat & cool for 1 hr.

6.9Decant solution over No. 200 (75µm) sieve with tap water wash; place
contents of beaker on the No. 200 (75µm) sieve, and wash with tap water.

6.10 Wash with Acetone.

6.11 Dry the sample to constant mass at a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C),
allow to cool, for 1 hour, determine the mass of the sample retained on the
#200 sieve to the nearest 0.1 percent of the total original dry sample mass.

______________________________________________________________________

100
November 2019

7. CALCULATION

7.1 The percentage of insoluble particles retained on the No. 200 (75µm)
sieve shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 percent by dividing the weight
of retained particles by the weight of the total sample (passing 3/4 in
(19.0mm.) sieve and retained on No. 8 (2.36mm) sieve), and multiplying by
100.

C = (A / B) X 100
where:
A = weight of particles retained on 75µm (Number 200) sieve

B = weight of total sample (passing 3/4 in (19.0mm.) sieve and

retained on No. 8 (2.36mm) sieve)

C = percentage of insoluble particles.

101
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 347-07

Test Method for Determining Moisture

Content by Speedy Moisture Tester
______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for determining the moisture content of
soils or fine aggregates by using a calcium carbide gas pressure moisture
tester. In general, samples having appreciable material retained on the 4.75
mm (#4) sieve should not be tested by this method. This test method
generally follows AASHTO T 217.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 AASHTO T 217, Determination of Moisture in Soils by Means of a
Calcium Carbide Gas Pressure Moisture Tester.
 AASHTO M 231, Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials.
 AASHTO R 11, Indicating Which Places of Figures Are to Be Considered
Significant in Specified Limiting Values.
 AASHTO R 16, Regulatory Information for Chemicals Used in AASHTO
Tests.
 AASHTO T 265, Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils.
______________________________________________________________________
3. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE

3.1 This test method is of primary significance in determining the acceptability

of soil materials for use in meeting the requirements of Sections 210, 301,
302, and 306 of the Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

____________________________________________________________________________
4. APPARATUS

4.1 Calcium Carbide Pressure Moisture Tester - a chamber with attached

pressure gage for the water content of specimens having a mass of at least
20 grams.

102
November 2019

4.2 Balance – shall conform to M 231, Class G2.

4.3 Two 1.25 in. (31.75 mm) diameter steel balls.

_____________________________________________________________________
5. MATERIAL

5.1 Calcium carbide reagent.

Note: The calcium carbide must be finely pulverized and should be of a

grade capable of producing acetylene gas in the amount of at least 2.25 ft3
/ lb (0.14 m3 / kg) of carbide.

Note: The “shelf life” of the calcium carbide reagent is limited, so it should
be used according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

______________________________________________________________________
6. PROCEDURE

6.1 Place two steel balls 1.25 in. (31.75 mm diameter) inside the Body of the
tester.

6.2 Place three level scoops (approx. 24 grams) of calcium carbide reagent in
the Body of the moisture tester.

Note: The carbide reagent reacts violently with moisture and care should
be exercised by the operator when using it.

6.3 Weigh a sample to be tested on the scale provided. The normal sample
weight is 26 grams.

Note: If the moisture content of the sample exceeds the limit of the pressure
gauge, (17 or 18 percent) a one - half size sample (13 grams) may be used
by attaching the 13 gram weight provided to the weighing pan and doubling
the obtained gauge reading, (2 X GAUGE READING). Even though the
sample size may be one half, three (3) scoops of reagent should still be
used. For low moisture contents, (Less than 5%), larger samples may be
used. Two or three standard size samples (26 grams each) may be used
and the gauge reading divided by the number of samples used.
GAUGE READING
(NUMBER OF SAMPLES)

6.4 Place the weighed sample in the Cap of the tester. (Be certain cap is clean).
Seal the tester by holding it horizontal to prevent any mixing of sample with
reagent. Place the cap in position, bring stirrup around the cap and tighten
the top screw. A pressure tight seal is critical.

103
November 2019

6.5 Raise the moisture tester to a vertical position so that the soil in the cap will
fall into the pressure vessel.

6.6 Mix the sample and reagent by shaking the tester vigorously so that all lumps
will be broken up to permit carbide reaction with all available free moisture.
The tester should be shaken with a rotating motion so that the steel balls will
not damage the tester or cause soil particles to become embedded in the
orifice leading to the pressure diaphragm. Repeat this procedure until the
gauge needle stops and subsequent shaking produces no change in the
gauge reading.

Note: For clay type soils the time to test may require up to ten minutes before
the gauge needle stops. Three consecutive identical gauge readings (after
shaking procedure) may be used to determine that the moisture content has
been adequately determined.

6.7 When the gauge needle stops moving, read the dial (to nearest 0.1%) while
holding the tester in a horizontal position with the gauge vertical and facing
the operator.

6.8 Record the dial reading (To the nearest 0.1%).

Note: The dial reading represents the percentage of moisture by wet

weight of material and must be converted to dry weight. (See 6.10).

6.9 With the cap of the tester pointed away from the operator, slowly release the
gas pressure by loosening the top screw. Empty the tester and clean it.
Examine the tested material for lumps. If the sample is not completely
pulverized, the test should be repeated using a new sample.

______________________________________________________________________
7. CALCULATION

7.1 The percentage of moisture by dry weight of the sample shall be determined
from the conversion chart provided (or the one included with) the tester kit.

Note: For sample weights other than the standard (26 grams) such as 13
grams the gauge reading must be adjusted before conversion from the
chart.(see 6.3 notes) Newer gauges may use various standard sample
weights.

7.2 The conversion chart should be used as shown by the example below.
Example - A 13-gram clay sample has been tested and the gauge reading
is 11.7. Therefore: 11.7% X 2 = 23.4% corrected gauge reading. From
the conversion chart locate (23%) in the left column. Go across the (23%)
row until the (.4%) column is reached and record 30.5%.

104
November 2019

______________________________________________________________________
8. CARE – CALIBRATION - REPAIR

8.1 The carbide moisture tester is a durable, precision instrument. To obtain

accurate results and service life from the tester it is essential that the
apparatus be kept clean and the wooden case kept dry.

8.2 Should the moisture tester need repairs, replacement parts, or recalibration,
the entire kit should be returned to the Materials Division for this service.

______________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX

105
November 2019

SPEEDY MOISTURE TESTER CONVERSION CHART

% 0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
1 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
3 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2
4 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3
5 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
6 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
7 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 8.0 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6
8 8.7 8.8 8.9 9.0 9.1 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7
9 9.8 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.8 10.9
10 11.0 11.1 11.3 11.4 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 12.1 12.2
11 12.3 12.4 12.6 12.7 12.9 13.0 13.1 13.2 13.4 13.5
12 13.6 13.7 13.8 14.0 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.5 14.6 14.8
13 14.9 15.0 15.2 15.3 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.9 16.0 16.2
14 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.7 16.8 16.9 17.0 17.2 17.3 17.5
15 17.6 17.7 17.9 18.0 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.6 18.7 18.9
16 19.0 19.1 19.3 19.4 19.6 19.7 19.8 20.0 20.1 20.3
17 20.4 20.6 20.7 20.9 21.0 21.2 21.3 21.5 21.6 21.8
18 21.9 22.1 22.2 22.4 22.6 22.7 22.8 23.0 23.1 23.3
19 23.4 23.6 23.7 23.9 24.0 24.2 24.4 24.5 24.7 24.8
20 25.0 25.2 25.3 25.6 25.8 25.8 25.9 26.1 26.2 26.4
21 26.5 26.7 26.9 27.0 27.2 27.4 27.6 27.7 27.9 28.0
22 28.2 28.4 28.5 28.7 28.8 29.0 29.2 29.3 29.5 29.6
23 29.8 30.0 30.2 30.3 30.5 30.7 30.9 31.0 31.2 31.3
24 31.5 31.7 31.9 32.0 32.2 32.4 32.6 32.8 32.9 33.1
25 33.3 33.5 33.7 33.8 34.0 34.2 34.4 34.6 34.9 35.1
26 35.3 35.4 35.6 35.7 35.9 36.0 36.2 36.4 36.5 36.7
27 36.9 37.1 37.3 37.5 37.7 37.9 38.1 38.3 38.4 38.6

106
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 348-07

Test Method for Moisture Content of

Soils or Aggregates
________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method provides a laboratory procedure for determining the
percentage of the moisture content in soils or aggregates. This test method
generally follows AASHTO T 265.

________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 AASHTO T 265, Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of
Soils.
 AASHTO M 231, Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials.
 AASHTO T 217, Determination of Moisture in Soils by Means of a
Calcium Carbide Gas Pressure Moisture Tester

________________________________________________________________
3. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE

3.1 This test method is of primary significance in determining the

acceptability of soil materials for use in meeting the requirements of Sections
210, 301, 302 and 306 of the Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction.

________________________________________________________________
4. APPARATUS

4.1 Balance - The balance shall have sufficient capacity, be readable to 0.1
percent of the sample mass, or better, and conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 231.

4.2 Drying Oven - Thermostatically controlled, preferably of the forced-draft type,

capable of being heated continuously at a temperature of 230°F ± 9°F (110
± 5°C). A Hot Plate capable of maintaining a temperature of 230°F ± 9°F
(110 ± 5°C) is also acceptable.

107
November 2019

4.3 Containers - Suitable containers made of material resistant to corrosion and

not subject to change in mass or disintegration on repeated heating and
cooling. Containers shall have close-fitting lids to prevent loss of moisture
from samples before initial weighing and to prevent absorption of moisture
from the atmosphere following drying and before final weighing. One
container is needed for each moisture content determination.

4.4 Speedy Moisture Tester - A suitable calcium-carbide gas pressure tester

may be used to determine moisture contents of fine soils and sand.

________________________________________________________________
5. PROCEDURE

5.1 Select a representative quantity of moist soil in the amount indicated in Table
1.

Table 1
_____________________________________________________
Maximum Particle Size Minimum Mass of
Sample, g
_____________________________________________________
No. 40 (0.425mm) sieve 10
No. 4 (4.75mm) sieve 100
½ in. (12.5mm) sieve 300
1 in. (25.0 mm) sieve 500
2 in. (50 mm) sieve 1000
_____________________________________________________

5.2 Weigh a clean, dry container with its lid, and place the moisture content
sample in the container. Replace the lid immediately, and weigh the
container, including the lid and moist sample. Remove the lid and place the
container with the moist sample in the drying oven maintained at a
temperature of 230°F ± 9°F (110 ± 5°C) and dry to a constant mass.
Immediately upon removal from the oven, replace the lid and allow the
sample to cool to room temperature. Weigh the container including the lid
and the dried sample.

 Checking every moisture content sample to determine that it is dried

to a constant mass is impractical. In most cases, drying of a moisture
content sample overnight (15 to 16 hours) is sufficient. In cases where
there is no doubt concerning the adequacy of overnight drying, drying
should be continued until the mass after two successive periods of
drying indicates no change in mass. Samples of sand may often be
dried to constant mass in a period of several hours. Since dry soil
may absorb moisture from wet samples, dried samples should be
removed before placing wet samples in the oven.

108
November 2019

 Oven drying at 230°F ± 9°F (110 ± 5°C) does not result in reliable
moisture content values for soil containing gypsum or other minerals
having loosely bound water from hydration or for soil containing
significant amounts of organic material. Reliable moisture content
values for these soils can be obtained by drying in an oven at
approximately 140 °F (60°C), or by vacuum desiccation at a pressure
of approximately 0.4 in. (10mm) Hg and at a temperature not lower
than 73°F (23°C).

 A container without a lid may be used provided the moist sample is

weighed immediately after being taken, and providing the dried
sample is weighed immediately after being removed from the oven or
after cooling in a desiccator.

 Moisture content samples should be discarded and should not be

used in any other tests.

5.3 If the speedy moisture tester is used, follow the procedure set forth in
ARDOT Test Method 347. This method should only be used for fine-grained
soils or fine concrete aggregate.

________________________________________________________________
6. CALCULATIONS

6.1. Calculate the moisture content of the soil as follows:

w = [(mass of moisture)/(mass of oven-dry soil)] x 100 = [(W 1-W 2)/(W 2-W C)] x 100

where:
w = moisture content, percent
W1 = mass of container and moist soil, g
W2 = mass of container and oven–dried soil, g
WC = mass of container, g

6.2 Calculate the percent of moisture content (w) to the nearest 0.1 percent.

109
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 398-07

Test Method for

Jar Slake Test

1. SCOPE

1.1 The test is intended to assess the resistance to weathering of rock samples
by a simple and quick procedure. The basis for the test is that weak
cemented or compacted argillaceous materials absorb moisture when
subjected to a very basic, simulated Slake Durability Index (SDI) on the
samples which are weakest and disaggregate (breakdown) readily.

2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Kentucky State Department of Transportation Test Methods:

Test Method 64-514-77

Arkansas Department of Transportation Test Methods:

ARDOT TM 399

3. APPARATUS

3.1 Drying oven capable of maintaining a temperature of 230°± 9° F

(110°± 5° C).

3.2 Beakers or at least 250 milliliter capacity.

3.3 Distilled or tap water.

4. SAMPLE

4.1 Representative samples may be obtained from drilled core samples,

excavation sites, shot rock from quarries or other available sources.

110
November 2019

4.2 Samples may be prepared for testing by crushing, splitting, and / or efficient
means which will produce the desired size of sample.

4.3 Adequate information should be supplied with the samples to properly and
exactly identify such as job number, station number, location, depth, and any
other pertinent information which might be of value.

4.4 Select representative samples for testing from the original rock source.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1 Oven dry at 230°± 9° F (110°± 5° C) an approximately 50 gram sample of

material for at least 6 hours, then let it cool at least 30 minutes at room
temperature.

5.2 Immerse the sample in a beaker of distilled or tap water at least one half inch
below the surface.

5.3 Observe at 5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes for the first hour noting the time
and behavior with each observation; then at intervals (2, 4, 6, 8, and 24
hours) thereafter.

6. REPORT

6.1 If sample breaks down completely, report SDI = 0.

6.2 If partial breakdown or no change occurs, report according to the following

scheme. Slake Durability Index Test must then be performed (ARDOT Test
Method 399).

6.2.1 Category Behavior

1. Degrades to pile of flakes or mud (complete Breakdown).

2. Breaks rapidly and/or forms many chips.
3. Breaks slowly and/or forms many chips.
4. Breaks rapidly and/or develops several fractures.
5. Breaks slowly and/or develops few fractures.
6. No change.

111
November 2019

6.3 The report should also include an estimation of the rock’s hardness based
on the following classification:

6.3.1 Jar Index Slake Durability Index Classification

(JI) (SDI)
6 95-100 Hard
*4,5 50-94 Medium Hard
1,2,3 Less than 50 Soft

* Caution
The Jar Slake Test is only meant to be a quick indicator test and is not
intended to be used instead of the SDI Test. The SDI Test should be used
as the primary test for determining the true characteristics of the rock being
evaluated.

112
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 399-08

Test Method for

Determination of Slake Durability Index
1. SCOPE

1.1 The test procedures are intended to assess the resistance to weathering
of rock samples after being subjected to two (2) standard cycles or drying
and wetting. The basis for the tests is that weakly cemented or compacted
argillaceous materials absorb moisture when subjected to a simulated
weathering. Moisture absorption by the soil-like rock may cause
disaggregation in the form of powdering, spalling, or flaking of the sample
surface, or separations along bedding planes.

2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Kentucky State Department of Transportation Test Methods:

Test Method 64-514-77

3. APPARATUS

3.1 Slake durability testing machine.

3.1.1 A test drum comprised of a 2.00 mm standard mesh cylinder of unobstructed

length 100 mm and diameter 140 mm, with solid fixed base. The drum has
a solid removable lid. The drum must be sufficiently strong to retain its shape
during use, but neither the exterior of the mesh nor the interior of the drum
should be obstructed for example, by reinforcing members.

3.1.2 A trough, to contain the test drum supported with axis horizontal in a
manner allowing free rotation, capable or being filled with water to a level
20 mm below the drum axis. The drum is mounted to allow 40 mm
unobstructed clearance between the trough and the base of the mesh. The
principal features of the trough and drum assembly areillustrated below.

3.1.3 A motor drive capable of rotating the drum at speed of 20 rpm, the speed
must be held to within 5 percent for a period of 10 minutes.

113
November 2019

3.2 An oven capable of maintaining a temperature of 230°± 9°F (110°± 5°C) for
a period of at least 12 hours.

3.3 A balance of suitable capacity capable of weighing to an accuracy of 1.0

grams.

3.4 Containers of at least 500 milliliter capacity. (Porcelain Pans, Beakers, or

similar).

4. SAMPLE

4.1 Representative samples may be obtained from drilled core samples,

excavation sites, shot rock from quarries or other available sources.

4.2 Samples may be prepared for testing by crushing,splitting, or any efficient

means which will produce the desired size of sample.

4.3 Adequate information should be supplied with the samples to properly and
exactly identify such as job number, station number,location, depth, and any
other pertinent information which might be or value.

4.4 Select representative samples for testing from the original rock source.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1 Number containers.

5.2 Select samples and place them in numbered containers. Use 10 pieces of
material in each container. Each piece should weigh 40-50 grams. The
total sample should weight 450-550 grams.

5.3 Oven dry sample for at least 12 hours @ 230°± 9° F (110°± 5° C).

5.4 Weigh and record the weight of the sample (W1).

5.5 Place the oven dried sample in the test drum and mount in the trough. Adjust
water level in the trough to 20 mm below the horizontal drum axis and rotate
the drum at 20 revolutions per minute for 10 minutes.

5.6 Remove the sample from the drum and repeat Steps 5.3 and 5.5.

5.7 Remove the sample from the drum and oven dry sample for at least 12
hours @ 230°± 9° F (110°± 5° C).

5.8 Weigh and record the weight of the sample (W2).

114
November 2019

6. CALCULATION

6.1 The Slake Durability Index is calculated as the percentage ratio of final to
initial dry sample weights as follows:

Slake Durability Index (SDI) = (W2 / W1) x 100

7. REPORT

7.1 The report should include the following information for each sample tested.

7.1.1 The Slake Durability Index (second cycle) to the nearest 0.1 percent.

7.1.2 The appearance of fragments retained in the drum.

7.1.3 Any special comments which might apply such as "Test samples produced
from core samples","Samples contained Sandstone Layers", "Samples had
thin silt and sand lenses cementing sample layers", etc.

115
November 2019

tm449ARDOT Test Method 449 (Revised January 2019)

Determination of Asphalt Content of Asphalt Mixtures

by the Nuclear Method

_____________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method covers the quantitative determination of the asphalt binder
content of asphalt mixtures by examining a sample with a device that utilizes
neutron-thermalization techniques.

______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 T 287, Asphalt Binder Content of Asphalt Mixtures by the Nuclear
Method
 T 168, Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 T 329, Moisture Content of Asphalt Mixtures by Oven

2.2 Arkansas Department of Transportation Test Methods:

 ARDOT 449A, Calibration of Asphalt Content Gauge Troxler 3241-C

2.3 Arkansas Department of Transportation Special Provisions:

 Submission of Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix Acceptance Test Results
______________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.1 Nuclear Asphalt Content Gauge as described in AASHTO T 287.

3.2 Three or more stainless steel sample pans conforming to the gauge
requirements

3.3 Scales with a capacity of at least 12,000 grams and readable to 0.1 gram

3.4 Incidental equipment - thermometer, large spoon or trowel, gloves, safety

equipment, etc.

116
November 2019

3.5 Leveling plate – flat, rigid plate of metal [minimum thickness of 10 mm (0.4
in.)], Plexiglass [minimum thickness of 12.5 mm (0.5 in.), or nonabsorptive
plywood [minimum thickness of 19 mm (0.75 in.)], slightly larger than the
sample pans

______________________________________________________________________
4. HAZARDS

4.1 Operator must have attended the Nuclear Safety Class addressing the
gauge being used and be in possession of his/her dosimeter badge as
required by the Arkansas Department of Health before using the gauge.
Accuracy depends upon gauge calibration; great care should be taken in
sample preparation and later measurements. Accurate calibration can be
achieved by carefully following these instructions.

4.2 This apparatus may be sensitive to outside influences; therefore, any other
source of neutron radiation shall be kept at least 10 m [30 ft.] from the
apparatus during use. The area around the apparatus shall be kept free of
large amounts of hydrogenous material, such as water, plastics, or asphalt
during use.

______________________________________________________________________
5. PROCEDURE

5.1 Perform a background count with gauge. This should be an eight (8) minute
or greater reading. The background count should be performed daily or
whenever the gauge has been moved or the conditions within 1m (3.3 ft)
have changed.

5.2 If the background count has not changed by more the 1 percent from the
previous background count, then the apparatus shall be considered stable
and acceptable for use. If the gauge has been moved or if the surrounding
conditions have changed, additional background counts must be obtained
until the 1 percent standard is satisfied.

5.3 Record background counts on a daily log.

5.4 Insure appropriate calibration information is activated in the gauge.

5.5 Obtain a representative sample of asphalt mixture in accordance with

AASHTO T 168.

5.6 Place the asphalt mixture into the pan until it is about half full. Lightly tamp
the asphalt mixture in the pan with a preheated spoon or spatula.

5.7 Place additional asphalt mixture into the pan until the required weight, as
determined in mix design calibration (ARDOT 449A), is reached within
±5 grams.

5.8 Place the leveling plate on top of the asphalt mixture immediately after filling
the pan. Compact the sample into the pan until it is level with the top of the

117
November 2019

pan by pressing down on the plate. Sight across the top of the pan to ensure
that the asphalt mixture does not protrude above the pan.

5.9 Verify that the weight is still within ±5 grams of the calibration weight.

5.10 Measure the temperature of the sample. The sample shall be tested at the
approximate temperature (±10°F/±5.5°C) of the calibration samples.

5.11 Place sample pan in gauge. Close and latch the door.

5.12 Run a 4, 8, or 16-minute test of the sample.

5.13 Remove sample pan from gauge and empty sample from pan (Additional
tests can be performed on the same sample before removing it from the pan
if desired. Results from multiple tests of the same sample will be reported as
an average.) Record counts and asphalt content from gauge to the nearest
0.01%.

5.14 Determine moisture content of asphalt mixtures by oven method to the

nearest 0.01%. (AASHTO T329)

5.15 Subtract moisture content from gauge derived asphalt content and report to
0.1%. This is the reported asphalt content.

5.16 During production of asphalt a dry aggregate blank sample may be prepared
and tested to ensure that changes in aggregate do not occur unnoticed.

5.17 After an interruption of mix production of more than 120 calendar days a
verification of the mix calibration shall be performed by preparing a sample
for testing in the gauge at the design asphalt content. A record with date, mix
design number and mix design production dates shall be kept with the gauge
calibration worksheets.
______________________________________________________________________
6. REPORT

6.1 Complete the Asphalt Plant Inspector’s Workbook

For Contractors: ACHM Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet for Contractors /

Suppliers and on paper. A copy of this can be found at:
http://www.arkansashighways.com/contracts/contractor_information/contractor.aspx

User Help Files and Utilities

Contractor_ACHM.exe (Excel 2000/2003/2007 required)

6.2 Report the daily background count on the gauge log.

118
November 2019

119
November 2019

tm449AARDOT Test Method 449A-10 (Revised July 2017)

Calibration of Asphalt Content Gauge

Troxler 3241-C
______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This procedure covers the calibration of the asphalt binder content mixtures
by testing a sample with a nuclear gauge.

1.2 Calibration samples are batched from percentages of aggregate, asphalt

binder, Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP), and/or Recycled Asphalt
Shingles (RAS) determined by the job mix design. Develop a new calibration
curve whenever there is a change in the source of asphalt or aggregate, or
a significant change in aggregate gradation.

1.3 Mix a minimum of three asphalt concrete samples:

 one at the design asphalt cement content
 one at 1.0% above the design asphalt cement content
 one at 1.0% below the design asphalt cement content

1.4 Mixing can be achieved by mechanical or hand-mixing. Hand-mixing is not

recommended. Mechanically mix the aggregate and asphalt binder for a
minimum of 2 minutes until they are thoroughly blended. Check the bottom
and sides of the bowl for unmixed aggregate and asphalt binder. If
necessary, mixing may be performed by hand in a large bowl. In this case,
the mixing time shall be a minimum of 5 minutes, but it may be longer to
ensure through mixing.
______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 T 287, Asphalt Binder Content of Asphalt Mixtures by the Nuclear
Method

Arkansas Department of Transportation Test Methods:

 ARDOT 449, Test Method for Determination of Asphalt Content of
Asphalt Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
______________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

120
November 2019

3.1 Nuclear Asphalt Content Gauge - Troxler Model 3241C

3.2 Three or more stainless steel sample pans conforming to the gauge
requirements

3.3 Asphalt Cement (AC) that will be used in the mix design (Approximately
1,800-2,300 grams of AC will be needed)

3.4 Aggregate to be used in the mix design, oven dried.

3.5 Oven, hot plate and/or infrared heater

3.6 Scales with a capacity of at least 12,000 grams and readable to 0.1 gram

3.7 Leveling plate – flat, rigid plate of metal [minimum thickness of 10 mm (0.4
in.)], Plexiglass [minimum thickness of 12.5 mm (0.5 in.), or nonabsorptive
plywood [minimum thickness of 19 mm (0.75 in.)], slightly larger than the
sample pans.

3.8 Thermometer with a temperature range of 10 to 260ºC (50 to 500ºF).

3.9 Containers capable of holding 10,000 grams of asphalt concrete hot mixes
and of withstanding 350°F.

3.10 Assorted small tools and items such as gloves, large mixing spoon or trowel,
scoops, safety equipment, etc.
_____________________________________________________________________
4. HAZARDS

4.1 Operator must have attended the Nuclear Safety Class addressing the
gauge being used and be in possession of his/her dosimeter badge as
required by the Arkansas Department of Health before using the gauge.
Accuracy depends upon gauge calibration; great care should be taken in
sample preparation and later measurements. Accurate calibration can be
achieved by carefully following these instructions.

4.2 This apparatus may be sensitive to outside influences; therefore, any other
source of neutron radiation shall be kept at least 10 m [30 ft.] from the
apparatus during use. The area around the apparatus shall be kept free of
large amounts of hydrogenous material, such as water, plastics, or asphalt
during use.
______________________________________________________________________
5. MIX DESIGN CALIBRATION

5.1 Standardization - Perform 16-minute background count on the gauge. If the

background count has not changed by more than 1 percent from the previous
background count, then the apparatus shall be considered stable and
acceptable for use. If the gauge has been moved or if the surrounding
conditions have changed, additional background counts must be obtained
until the 1 percent standard is satisfied.

121
November 2019

5.2 Aggregate Preparation - Determine batch weights using the aggregate blend
percentages in the mix design percentages. 8000 grams of dry
aggregate/RAP/RAS should be used for each calibration pan.
(See Figure 1)

5.3 Prepare four aggregate samples by blending the aggregates using the target
mass determined in Section 5.2. Place them in separate pans designed for
and capable of, transferring the dry aggregate into a mixing bowl with a
minimum loss of aggregate. Place them in an oven set at the mixing
temperature from the mix design.

Preparing samples with RAP and/or RAS: Combine hot (250°F - 320°F)
aggregate to produce "blank” sample; add the unheated RAP portion of
sample; place this mixture in heated oven (to within ±25°F (±14°C) of the
design mixing temperature) for one hour. After one hour remove the sample
and add RAS (if included in design) then thoroughly mix this aggregate and
RAP/RAS sample.

5.4 “Blank” Pan - To determine the calibration weight for all sample pans,
prepare a “blank” pan. Weigh a clean gauge-sample pan and/or tare the pan
on the scale.

5.5 Fill the pan with dry, hot aggregate/RAP/RAS in 2 layers. The first layer
should fill the pan approximately half full. Using a scoop, trowel, or mixing
spoon, lightly tamp the aggregate paying special attention to work corner
areas to eliminate air voids. Between layers, drop the pan onto the floor or
table from an approximate height of 1 inch.

5.6 The second layer should fill pan just slightly over the top edge and using a
straightedge, level the surface of the aggregate until the aggregate is even
with the top edge of the pan. Weigh and record the net weight on calibration
sheet to the nearest whole gram.

5.7 Determine temperature and record on calibration sheet, should be within

200°F - 300°F. Empty the calibration sample pan back into mixing bowl with
any remaining aggregate. Remix aggregate by turning over with scoop at
least 3 times.

5.8 Verify calibration weight by repeating steps 5.5 through 5.7 for a second
blank sample. This net weight should be within ±25 g of the first blank sample
net weight. If not, repeat steps 5.5 through 5.7 until two samples are within
tolerance. If within tolerance, use the last sample pan weight as the blank
calibration weight.

5.9 Place the pan into the gauge, and take a 16 minute count. Record the
measured count. During production of asphalt a dry aggregate blank sample
may be prepared and tested to ensure that changes in aggregate do not
occur unnoticed.

5.10 An initial, or “butter” batch is prepared using an asphalt binder/aggregate

blend approximating the real batches. This step is to put a light coat of

122
November 2019

asphalt on the mixing bowl to prevent loss during calibration. Discard

material once this step is completed.

5.11 Determine the mass of the heated mixing bowl to the nearest 0.1g.

5.12 Place a heated aggregate specimen, of the required mass to the nearest
0.1g, in the mixing bowl. Form a crater in the aggregate large enough to hold
the asphalt. Place the mixing bowl on the scale. Add the required, preheated
asphalt binder into the aggregate crater.
Example of Design with 5.3%
AC (100 - asphalt binder
Total Weight of Total weight of content)
Aggregate +
=
aggregate blend / [ 100 ]
Asphalt Binder Content

8447.7 g = 8000 g / [ (100 – 5.3)

100
]
Adding asphalt binder for samples with RAP or RAS: The mix design will
list the amount of new asphalt binder that should be added to the mix.
Example of Design with 5.3% AC, RAS contains 0.2% AC, RAP contains 0.1%
AC (100 – (Design
Total Weight of Total weight of AC - (AC of RAS+RAP))
Aggregate +
Asphalt Binder
= aggregate
blend/RAS/RAP
/[ 100 ]
Content

8421.1 g = 8000 g /[ (100 –( 5.3-(0.2+0.1))

100
]

5.13 Remove the asphalt mixture from the mixing container, and determine the
weight of the empty mixing container to ensure that all material has been
removed. The weight of the mixing container shall be within ±5 g of the
weight determined in Step 5.11. If it is not, scrape the bowl with a spatula
and deposit the excess into the sample until the mixing container is within
the tolerance.

5.14 Fill one sample pan with this mix. Fill the sample pan in two layers. For the
first layer, fill sample pan approximately half full. Then, using a preheated
spoon or spatula, lightly tamp the asphalt mixture paying special attention to
lightly work the corner areas. For the second layer, fill sample pan to slightly
heaping and weigh. Add or remove mix until the desired weight (determined
in Step 5.8) is obtained.

123
November 2019

5.15 Place the leveling plate on top of the asphalt mixture immediately after filling
the pan. Compact the sample into the pan until it is level with the top of the
pan by pressing down on the plate. Sight across the top of the pan to ensure
that the asphalt mixture does not protrude above the pan. Verify that the
weight is within ± 5 g of the calibration sample pan weight for all pans.

5.16 Determine temperature of sample and record; sample should be between

200°-300° F for testing. Calibrate at or near temperature field sample is
expected to be; this will allow for the temperature loss of the sample between
the time the sample is obtained and the time the sample is back at the lab
for testing. The sample may be placed in the oven to retain temperature
before the calibration procedure is started. DO NOT REHEAT SAMPLE
ONCE THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE HAS BEGUN.

5.17 Place sample in asphalt content gauge, close and latch door. Start a gauge
derived, three-sample calibration using a 16-minute count.

5.18 Record Measure Count and percent (%) on calibration form.

5.19 Repeat Steps 5.12 through 5.18 for remaining calibration percentages.

5.20 Record "Fit Coefficient". The Fit Coefficient shall be 0.995 or greater to be
acceptable. Review the calibration and record the A1, A2, A3 values.

5.21 Store calibration # and Mix ID using the digits in the mix design id after
desired fit coefficient is obtained. Example: HM123-17 will be 12317

______________________________________________________________________
6. REPORT

6.1 Complete Calibration Worksheet found in Appendix.

6.2 Keep a log sheet of the Mix Designs stored in the gauge.

124
November 2019

FIGURE 1

125
November 2019

FIGURE 1A

126
November 2019

1. Determine the dry batch by multiplying 8000 grams by each aggregate/RAS/RAP

percentage.
(8000 x 0.17, 8000 x 0.30, 8000 x 0.27, 8000 x 0.13, 8000 x .011, 8000 x 0.02)
2. Calculate Accumulative Weight. This result should add up to Mix Batch Weight
(8000 grams). Build four pans of with these batch weights.

3. Determine the Asphalt binder weight for each point using the formula in Section
5.12.

4. Fill out all the information on the form.

127
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 450-07

Extraction of Bituminous Mixtures by the Vacuum

Extractor
________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for determining the asphalt content in
bituminous mixtures using a vacuum extractor.

________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
i. T 164, Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Binder from Hot-Mix Asphalt
(HMA)
ii. T 168, Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures

________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.1 Vacuum extractor

3.2 Filter paper

3.3 Drying equipment

3.4 Balance - sensitive to 0.1 gram

3.5 Filtering aid - diatomaceous silica (J-M Celite 110)

3.6 Incidental equipment - containers, beakers, thermometers, spatula, brushes,

etc.

3.7 Solvent: Approved biodegradable extractant. This extractant shall be non-

halogenated, non-petroleum, non-toxic, and shall readily dissolve asphalt
cement from paving mixtures and place it into solution. This extractant shall
be easily rinsed from the remaining aggregate without forming a gel and the
water containing the extractant rinsed from the aggregate shall readily pass
through diatomaceous earth and filter.

128
November 2019

________________________________________________________________
4. HAZARDS

4.1 These solvents generally have flashpoints in range of 110° - 200°F. Use care
if used around open flames. Carefully dispose of rags/paper towels used to
clean up equipment or spills; spontaneous combustion of these items can
occur.

________________________________________________________________
5. PREPARATION OF TEST SPECIMEN

5.1 An uncompacted test specimen shall be the end result of quartering or

splitting of a representative sample obtained in an approved manner. The
size of the test specimen shall be governed by the nominal maximum size of
mineral aggregate in the mixture. The approximate minimum size of test
specimen shall be in accordance with the following table.

5.2 A compacted sample may be taken by coring, sawing, or other methods in

such manner as to ensure a minimum disturbance of the material. If this
sample is not sufficiently soft to separate, place in a large flat pan and warm
to 230° ±9° F (110° ±5° C) until it can be separated. Split or quarter the
sample until the mass of material required for the test is obtained. The
approximate minimum size of test specimen shall be in accordance with the
following table.

Nominal Maximum Particle Minimum Weight of Minimum Area of Minimum Weight of

Size Uncompacted Sample Compacted Sample Test Specimen
(pounds) (Sq. In.) (grams)
#4 4 36 1000
1/2'' 12 60 1500
3/4'' 16 100 2000
1'' 20 144 3000
1 1/2'' 25 144 4000

5.3 Determine moisture content by drying a portion of the sample to a constant

weight in an oven at a maximum temperature of 300-325° F (149-
163° C).

5.4 Weigh the sample, record the weight and place the mixture in a metal beaker
or other suitable container and allow cooling to approximately 200 °F. Add
enough solvent to cover the sample and allow to soak (minimum of 15-20
minutes) while stirring occasionally until all asphalt is visually in solution.
________________________________________________________________
129
November 2019

6. PROCEDURE

6.1 Place a dry, tarred filter on the vacuum extractor, set the funnel ring in place
and tighten the holding nuts snugly with the wrench provided.

6.2 Weigh 75-100 grams of oven-dried diatomaceous silica filtering aid into a
1000 ml Erlenmeyer flask and add approximately 800 ml of solvent, swirl
until the diatomaceous silica is completely in suspension.

6.3 Immediately pour the diatomaceous silica and solvent on the filter. Turn on
the vacuum pump and let it run until the pad formed by the diatomaceous
silica is surface dry and begins to crack slightly.

Note: Any filtering aid that may adhere to the inside of the flask or beaker
should be added to the filter pad by squirting solvent into the beaker in order
to remove and "wash out” all the filtering aid.

6.4 Carefully decant the solvent from the specimen into the extractor with the
pump running. Turn pump off when all solvent has passed through the filter.

Note: If the pumping process seems to be slow, turn off the pump and
carefully stir the diatomaceous silica down to the filter pad. Care must be
exercised when performing this, so that the filter pad is not damaged.

6.5 Pour enough solvent on the sample to cover all the aggregate, stir thoroughly
and decant into the extractor as before. Repeat this step until the solvent
in the sample is close to its original color.

6.6 Pour enough water on the sample to cover all the aggregate, stir thoroughly
and decant into the extractor as before. Repeat this step until all solvent
residue has been removed from the aggregate.

6.7 With the last wash, gently pour the entire specimen into the filter and wash
the sample container carefully into the extractor with water. Gently
distribute the sample evenly over the filter paper with a spatula and let the
vacuum pump run a few minutes after the last wash to aid in drying the
sample.

Note: Do not attempt to dry aggregate without thoroughly rinsing with water!
Recommended drying temperature is 230°f. Avoid drying over an open
flame.

130
November 2019

6.8 Scrape the aggregate away from the side of the funnel ring toward the center
of the filter to avoid loss when clinging aggregate into the drying pan. Pick
up the filter paper and aggregate by holding the filter paper on opposite sides
and raising it straight up (Pick up the perforated filter paper support/screen
with the filter paper, filter aid, and aggregate on it if there is a possibility the
filter will tear.) Transfer the specimen to the drying pan and brush the
clinging aggregate from the filter into the pan. Dry the aggregate thoroughly
and weigh the filter and aggregate. Record the weight and subtract the
weight of the filter and diatomaceous silica to determine the weight of the
extracted aggregate.

________________________________________________________________
7. CALCULATION

7.1 Calculate the percentage of bitumen by dividing loss in weight by

the original weight of the specimen.

Bitumen extracted = [(S-A)/S] x 100

Where: S = weight of test specimen

A = weight of extracted aggregate

7.2 The following pages contain a worksheet for sample calculations.

Note: Dispose of solvent residue by pouring it on the working face of the

coarse aggregate stockpile or the cold feeds and processing through the
asphalt plant in the course of normal operations. Do not accumulate this
residue over several days’ use.

131
November 2019

Arkansas Department of Transportation

Materials Division

ASPHALT MIXTURE EXTRACTION WORKSHEET

Job No.: Mix No.:

Date Sampled: Date Tested:

Lot/ Sublot No.: Type Mix:

ASPHALT CONTENT ASH-FILTER & FILTER CORRECTION

1. Wt. of Sample 9. Wt. of Filter Paper, Before
2. Wt. of Extract. Aggr. 10. Wt. of Filter Paper, After
3. Wt. of Filter Aid 11. Wt. of Filter Change
= [ 10. – 9. ]
4. Wt. of Ash & Filter Correction 12. Ash (Centrifuge Method,
Add 0.5 gram)
5. Corrected Wt. of Aggr. 13. Total Correction
= [ 2. – 3. + 4. ] = [ 11. + 12. ]
6. Wt. of Apparent Asphalt
7. Percent Asphalt
= [ 6. / 1. ] x 100
8. Percent Asphalt w Moist. Correct.
= [ 7. – 19. ]

MOISTURE CORRECTION AGGREGATE SIEVE ANALYSIS

14. Wt. of Pan + Spoon + Sample Total Wt. of Aggregate: ________________

Wt. After Washing: ________________

15. Wt. of Pan + Spoon Sieve Wt. Retained / % Retained / % Passing
Job
(mm) Mix
16. Wt. of Sample 37.5 / /
= [ 14. – 15. ]
17. Wt. of Pan + Spoon + Dry Sample 25 / /

18. Wt. of Moisture 19 / /

= [ 14. – 17. ]
19. Percent Moisture 12.5 / /
= [ 18. / 16. ] x 100
9.5 / /
Tested by: 4.75 / /
2.36 / /
CTTP No.: 1.18 / /
0.6 / /
Comments: 0.3 / /
0.150 / /
0.075 / /
0.075 Wt. Passing:
% AC:

132
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 451-07

Extraction of Bituminous Mixtures by Centrifuge

Extractors

________________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides procedures for determining the asphalt content in
bituminous mixtures using centrifuge extractors.

________________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
iii. T 164, Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Binder from Hot-Mix Asphalt
(HMA)
iv. T 168, Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures

________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.2 Vacuum extractor

3.2 Filter paper

3.3 Drying equipment

3.4 Balance - sensitive to 0.1 gram

3.5 Incidental equipment - containers, beakers, thermometers, spatula, brushes,

etc.

3.6 Solvent: Approved biodegradable extractant. This extractant shall be non-

halogenated, non-petroleum, non-toxic, and shall readily dissolve asphalt
cement from paving mixtures and place it into solution. This
extractant shall be easily rinsed from the remaining aggregate without
forming a gel and the water containing the extractant rinsed from the
aggregate shall readily pass through diatomaceous earth and filter.

133
November 2019

________________________________________________________________
4. HAZARDS

4.1 These solvents generally have flashpoints in range of 110° - 200°F. Use care
if used around open flames. Carefully dispose of rags/paper towels used to
clean up equipment or spills; spontaneous combustion of these items can
occur.

________________________________________________________________
5. PREPARATION OF TEST SPECIMEN

5.1 An uncompacted test specimen shall be the end result of quartering or

splitting of a representative sample obtained in an approved manner. The
size of the test specimen shall be governed by the nominal maximum size of
mineral aggregate in the mixture. The approximate minimum size of test
specimen shall be in accordance with the following table.

5.2 A compacted sample may be taken by coring, sawing, or other methods in

such manner as to ensure a minimum disturbance of the material. If this
sample is not sufficiently soft to separate, place in a large flat pan and warm
to 230° ±9° F (110° ±5° C) until it can be separated. Split or quarter the
sample until the mass of material required for the test is obtained. The
approximate minimum size of test specimen shall be in accordance with the
following table.

Nominal Maximum Specimen, Minimum Weight of Minimum Area of Minimum Weight of

Uncompacted Sample Compacted Sample
Particle Size (grams) (pounds) (Sq. In.) Test Specimen (grams)
#4 4 36 1000
1/2'' 12 60 1500
3/4'' 16 100 2000
1'' 20 144 3000
1 1/2'' 25 144 4000
5.3 Determine moisture content by drying a portion of the sample to a constant
weight in an oven at a maximum temperature of 300-325° F (149-163°
C).

5.4 Weigh the sample, record the weight and place the mixture in a metal beaker
or other suitable container and allow cooling to approximately 200° F. Add
enough solvent to cover the sample and allow to soak (minimum of 15-20
minutes) while stirring occasionally until all asphalt is visually in solution.
________________________________________________________________

134
November 2019

6. PROCEDURE

6.1 Place the weighed specimen in the extractor bowl and allow the specimen
to cool to approximately 200° F.

6.2 Cover the specimen in the bowl with solvent and allow sufficient time for the
solvent to disintegrate the specimen. Place a filter paper, which has been
dried and weighed, in position on the bowl and attach the bowl cover and
clamp tightly. Place a beaker under the drain to collect the extract.

6.3 Start the centrifuge revolving slowly and gradually increase the speed
(Maximum 3600 rpm) until the solvent flows from the drain in a slow trickle.
When the solvent ceases to flow, allow the machine to stop. Add
approximately 200 ml solvent and repeat the procedure. Keep repeating
until the extract is close to its original color.

6.4 Cover the specimen in the bowl with water and allow time for the specimen
to soak in the water. Centrifuge the sample as in Step 5.3 until the water
ceases to flow. Repeat this step until solvent residue has been removed
from the aggregate.

6.5 Remove the bowl from the extractor and remove the cover from the bowl.

6.6 Carefully remove the filter paper from the bowl and brush as much mineral
matter as possible into a pan into which the aggregate from the extractor
bowl has been placed. Dry the filter paper and the aggregate specimen.

6.7 Weigh the dried filter paper.

Note: Do not attempt to dry aggregate without thoroughly rinsing with water
(step 6.4). Recommended drying temperature is 230° F. Avoid drying over
an open flame!

6.8 Weigh the extracted aggregate.

________________________________________________________________
7. CALCULATIONS

7.1 Calculate the percent of bitumen as follows:

Percent Bitumen = [S - (A + F + 0.5)] / S

Where S = Weight of test specimen

A = Weight of extracted aggregate
F = Weight of gain of filter paper
0.5 = Ash correction factor

135
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 455A-11

Test Method for Water Sensitivity for Compacted

Bituminous Mixtures

______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method is applicable to the evaluation of the effects of water on the
strength of compacted bituminous mixtures. A numerical index of reduced
strength is obtained by comparing the Marshall Stability at 60° C (140° F) of
cured specimens with that of duplicate specimens that have been immersed
in water at 60° C (140° F) under a condition of vacuum saturation. This
method may also be used at test temperatures other than those indicated
above.

______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

This ARDOT Test Method is a modification of the Asphalt Institute Test

Procedure
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Standards:
i. T 245, Resistance to Plastic Flow of Asphalt Mixtures Using
Marshall Apparatus.

______________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS AND MATERIALS

3.1 Equipment required for testing of specimens is listed in AASHTO T 245,

“Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall
Apparatus”.

3.2 A 6 in. (150 mm) breaking head is required [not the standard 4 in.
(100 mm) breaking head]. Specimens will be compacted utilizing a
Superpave Gyratory Compactor (SGC).

3.3 Vacuum Chamber - The vacuum chamber may be any container capable of
withstanding partial vacuums lower than 30 mm Hg absolute pressure and
136
November 2019

large enough to hold a minimum of two 6 in. (150 mm) diameter test
specimens. A twenty two quart pressure cooker is satisfactory. A platform is
required to allow the access of water to all sides of the specimens.

3.4 Vacuum System - A laboratory vacuum pump or aspirator for evacuating the air
from the vacuum chamber to at least 30 mm Hg, and a manometer or
pressure gauge for measuring the vacuum in the chamber, shall be provided.

3.5 Water Bath(s) - A constant-temperature water bath capable of maintaining

temperature at 140+1.8° F (60±1° C) and of sufficient capacity to immerse a
minimum of two specimens and provide water for immersing specimens in
the vacuum chamber shall be used. Two separate water baths may also be
used.

3.6 Test Specimens

3.6.1 At least four specimens at the recommended asphalt content shall be

prepared by utilizing a Superpave Gyratory Compactor (SGC). The test
specimens will be compacted to NDes.

______________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE

4.1 The test specimens are separated into two groups identified as Group A and
Group B. Weigh the samples to the nearest 0.1 gram. Test the Group A
specimens as described in paragraph 4.2 and test the Group B specimens
as described in paragraph 4.3.

4.2 Group A are tested according to AASHTO T 245.

Note: If stability of the specimens is greater than 10,000 lbs. (44 kN)
additional samples (both Group A & B) must be prepared and tested
utilizing a indirect tensile strength breaking head.

4.3 Group B - Within 24 hours after fabrication, place Group B specimens in the
vacuum chamber. Connect the vacuum source and leave the specimens
under vacuum for one hour after the manometer or gage indicates a partial
vacuum of 30 mm Hg, or less absolute pressure. At the end of the one hour
period, open the hose clamp or valve on the line leading to the 140 + 1.8°F
(60 ± 1°C) water bath and allow to enter slowly into the vacuum chamber.
After specimens are completely submerged in water, the vacuum shall be
released. The specimens shall be transferred in a water filled container in a
submerged condition to the water bath maintained at 140 +1.8°F (60 + 1°C).
The specimens shall remain in the bath for 24 hours. At the end of 23 hours,
determine water absorption of specimens as described in paragraph 4.4.
137
November 2019

The stability of the specimens shall be determined according to AASHTO T

245. (See Note in paragraph 4.2)

4.4 Water absorption shall be determined one hour before testing for Marshall
stability. Specimens shall be removed one at a time from the 140 + 1.8° F
(60 + 1° C) water bath and the surface-dry weight of each specimen shall be
determined by quickly blotting the specimens surface with a damp towel and
weighing. Return specimens to the water bath immediately, and after one
hour proceed with Marshall stability determination.

______________________________________________________________________
5. CALCULATIONS

5.1 Calculate water absorption of each immersed-in-water specimen as follows:

B A
Water Absorption, percent =  100
A
Where:
A = weight in grams of dry specimen before 24 hour Immersion (from
paragraph 4.1)
B = weight in grams of surface-dry specimen after 23 hour
immersion

5.2 The numerical index of water sensitivity shall be expressed as the

percentage of stability retained after water immersion. It shall be calculated
for the asphalt content as follows:
S
Retained Stability, percent = B  100
SA
Where:
SA = average Marshall stability of Group A
SB = average Marshall stability of water-immersed specimens
(Group B)

______________________________________________________________________
6. REPORT

6.1 The report shall include the following average values for the asphalt content:

6.1.1 Average unit weight in lbs/cu.ft. (kg/cu m) and air voids in percent for
Groups A and B specimens.

6.1.2 Marshall Stability in lbs. (kN) and flow value in 0.01 in. (0.1 mm) for Groups
A and B specimens.

6.1.3 Retained stability, percent.

6.1.4 Water absorption, percent, is calculated, but not reported.

138
November 2019

Note: The stabilities obtained in testing specimens compacted utilizing a SGC will be
significantly greater than specimens prepared with a Marshall Compaction apparatus.

139
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 460-07

Test Method for Solvent Washing and Sieve Analysis
of Asphalt Concrete
______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for the determination of particle size distribution
of aggregates from bituminous mixtures from which the asphalt cement has
been removed.

______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCE
This
ARDOT Test Method is a modification of the Asphalt Institute Test
Procedure

______________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS AND MATERIALS

3.1 Drying equipment

3.2 Containers

3.3 Sieves

3.4 Solvent

3.4.1 Approved biodegradable solvent (These solvents generally have flash

points in the range of 140-200 F (60-93 C). USE CARE IF USED
AROUND OPEN FLAMES. Odors from these solvents may be nauseous
to some people, use laboratory ventilation.

3.5 Sample

3.5.1 The sample shall normally consist of the entire sample or a reduced sample
of asphalt concrete which has been tested for asphalt cement content in
accordance with ARDOT Test Method 449. (Asphalt Content of Asphalt
Mixtures by the Nuclear Method). Asphalt mixes with a Nominal Maximum
Particle Size of 1½" (37.5 mm) or greater will require a separate sample
taken for this test. See Table 1 for minimum sample size.
140
November 2019

Table 1
Nominal Maximum Minimum Weight of Minimum Weight of Test
Particle Size (inches) Sample (lbs) Specimen
½"(12.5 mm) 12 lbs (5.4 kg) 1500 grams
¾"(19mm) 16 lbs (7.2 kg) 2000 grams
1"(25mm) 20 lbs (9.0 kg) 3000 grams
1 ½"(37.5 mm) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 4000 grams
2 ½"(62.5 mm) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 4000 grams

Note: The test specimen may be divided into suitable increments, tested, and the
results appropriately combined if the mass of the test specimen exceeds the
capacity of the equipment.

______________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE

4.1 Record percent (%) asphalt cement content and weigh and record test
sample weight.

4.2 The test sample after being tested for asphalt cement content (ARDOT TM
449) shall be placed in a suitable container and allowed to cool to
approximately 200 F (93 C). Cover the sample with solvent and allow to
soak while stirring occasionally until all asphalt cement is visually in solution.

4.3 Pour the solvent over nested No.8 (2.36 mm) and No.200 (0.075 mm) sieves,
taking care to avoid, as much as possible, the decantation of coarse particles
of the sample. The solvent should be caught in a container for later disposal.
Repeat the solvent washing operation until the solvent is close to its original
color. Return all material retained on the sieves to the sample container.

4.4 Repeat Steps 4.2-4.3 using water to rinse solvent residue from the
aggregate (A small amount of liquid detergent mixed with the aggregate
before rinsing may help remove solvent residue.).

4.5 Dry the washed sample to constant weight, allow to cool and weigh to the
nearest 0.1 gram.

4.6 Sieve the sample over sieves of the various sizes required by the
specifications including the No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. The total weight of
material retained on each sieve shall be recorded. Determine total weight of
aggregate by multiplying the sample weight determined in Step 4.1 by the
percent of aggregate in the sample [100%-(% AC content)]. The weights
retained shall be converted to percentages by dividing the total weight of
aggregate. The weight of aggregate passing the No. 200 (0.075 mm)
includes the material passing the No. 200 (0.075 mm) during the solvent and
the water washings (Steps 4.3 & 4.4) and that passing the No. 200 (0.075
mm) during the dry sieving (Step 4.6).
141
November 2019

______________________________________________________________________
5. REPORT

5.1 The results of the sieve analysis shall be reported as percent passing each
sieve. Percentages shall be reported to the nearest whole number except
for the No. 200 (0.075 mm) which shall be reported to the nearest 0.1
percent.

142
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 461-07

Test Method for In-Place Density and Percent

Compaction of Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix Using a
Nuclear Gauge

______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test is designed to measure the density and the degree of compaction
of Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix (ACHM) using a portable nuclear density testing
device. Results may be obtained rapidly allowing for improvement in the
compaction process through use of the gauge. One reported compaction
test shall be the average of a minimum of three compaction results;
each compaction result shall be based upon a gauge density reading
taken a separate random location. These gauges contain nuclear sources
that require Arkansas State Department of Health licensing and special
training before they may be utilized.

______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCE

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

 D 2950 – Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete
in Place by Nuclear Methods

______________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.1 Nuclear device equivalent to that described in ASTM D 2950.

3.2 Reference Standard and air gap spacer may be provided with each gauge
for checking the gauge operation by providing a stable condition for a
reproducible count rate. The standard may also serve as a surface voids
correction plate for use on rough textured surfaces.

3.3 Standardization of Nuclear Gauge

3.3.1 To be run each day before gauge use. (See Note 1. at the end of this test method.)
143
November 2019

3.3.2 Place the standard on asphalt concrete surface course at least 10 feet
(3 m) away from any large object and at least 60 feet (18.3 m) from any
other nuclear gauge.

3.3.3 Place the gauge on the spacer and/or on the reference standard, apply
power to the unit and wait the required time period for all circuits to stabilize
(Refer to operator's manual for turn on and warm up procedures).
3.3.4 After the warm up period, standardize the gauge as per the manufacturer's
instructions.

3.3.5 If the reading is outside limits, check to see that the gauge does not rock on
the spacer or the standard block, and that there are no other gauges in the
area. Then retake the reading. If an acceptable reading cannot be obtained
in repeated attempts, contact the manufacturer.

3.4 Calibration Procedures – Job Correction Factor

3.4.1 Prior to use on each project compare each nuclear gauge to a minimum of
five (5) core densities for each mix design used on the project. The gauge
readings should be taken at the same timer interval following laydown as
that which will occur between laydown and acceptance testing.

A minimum of four (4) gauge readings should be taken from the same
location (within 1ft. (.3 m) of core) as each of the core density samples. It
may be necessary to spread a fine sand over the surface of coarse mixes to
eliminate the influence of surface voids. Level the sand with scraper plate.
(Surface roughness may cause a lower than actual density determination.)
Take gauge readings at the "12 o'clock", "3 o'clock", "6 o'clock", and "9
o'clock" positions around the core. During the determination of the correction
factor, align the gauge so that an axis between the density source and the
detectors is parallel to the direction of laydown and the source is closer to
the lay down operation for the gauge readings at the "3 o'clock", "6 o'clock",
and "9 o'clock" positions. Align the gauge so that an axis between the density
source and the detectors is parallel to the direction of lay down and the
source is further from the lay down operation for the gauge reading at the
"12 o'clock" position. Determine the difference between each core density
and the average of the four gauge readings taken at the core location. This
is the core correction factor. Average the five core correction factors to
obtain a Job Correction Factor. If this Job Correction Factor is more than 1
lb./cu. ft. (16 kg /cu m) apply to all densities determined by the gauge for that
particular mix design. If this Job Correction Factor is less than 1 lb./cu. ft.
(16 kg /cu m) do not use a Job Correction Factor, read and report the
densities directly from the gauge for that particular mix design. (EACH
GAUGE MUST HAVE A CORRECTION FACTOR ON EACH PROJECT
FOR EACH MIX DESIGN WITH WHICH IT IS USED). When the average of
the gauge readings is less than the core sample density the Job Correction
Factor shall be added to the Wet Density determined by the gauge. (See

144
November 2019

the form at the end of this test method.) Record Job Correction Factor with
the appropriate plus or minus sign. See Note 2.

Direction of Paving


Calibration of the nuclear gauge using the direct transmission mode should
follow procedures in this method but will require drilling four holes in the
asphalt layer where the density is being taken at the positions indicated
above.

3.5 There is an apparent change in surface texture of the ACHM pavement

overnight which could affect gauge readings. The core densities therefore
may be several lb./cu.ft. (kg/cu m) different from the gauge readings if there
is a time difference between the time following laydown of the gauge
readings and the time following laydown that the core is taken. Gauge
readings taken a day or more following laydown will not agree with the gauge
readings taken shortly after laydown.

______________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE

4.1 The density / percent compaction (%) of each sublot will be the average
result from gauge readings taken at a minimum of three (3) random locations
in the sublot. One gauge reading will be made at each of the random
locations.

4.2 Record station and distance from the outside edge of the asphalt mat (Do
not make tests within 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) of the asphalt mat's edges) of each
gauge reading. Determine locations (minimum of 3 per sublot) using ARDOT
TM 465, Procedures for Sampling by Random Number Tables.

4.3 Take one reading (Wet Density) at each of the locations, apply the Job
Correction Factor to each reading, and report to the nearest 0.1 lb./cu.ft. (1.6
kg/ cu m). Determine the Max. Sp. Grav. at each location based upon best
available AC content information for the location(Contractor’s or ARDOT
Inspector’s Max. Sp. Grav. result for sublot). Report percent compactions
based upon corrected gauge density and the Max. Sp. Grav.

4.4 Procedure-Density Testing Moisture/Density Gauge (Backscatter Method)

4.4.1 General - The Backscatter Method is used with asphalt concrete hot mixes.

145
November 2019

4.4.2 Set the timer switch to "FAST" or "NORMAL"("NORMAL" if pavement

temperature less than 120° F (48° C)), set the depth switch to "BS", and set
moisture correction switches to "0".

4.4.3 With programmable gauges set the maximum theoretical density in the
gauge. (Determine according to Step 5.2.)

4.4.4 Place the gauge on the surface of the asphalt, choosing a smooth flat surface
with a minimum of voids for best results. The gauge should be aligned as in
the “6 o’clock” calibration position, with the source closer to the paving
operation. Check by placing a hand on opposite corners of the base of the
gauge and attempt to rock the gauge. If it was necessary to spread a fine
sand over the surface of coarse mixes to eliminate the influence of surface
voids during calibration, use the fine sand during testing. Level the sand with
scraper plate. (Surface roughness may cause a lower than actual density
determination.)

4.4.5 Repeat the above procedure for each test.

4.4.6 Place the source rod in the "BACKSCATTER" position and press the
"MEASURE" key. At the end of the count time, Wet Density will be
displayed. With a zero (0) correction factor the percent compaction will be
displayed on programmable gauges by depressing the "SHIFT" and "%MA”
keys.

4.5 Procedure – Density Testing Thin Lift Gauge (Normal Mode)

4.5.1 General – The Normal Mode is recommended on mixes with 40% or more fines
(40% passing the No. 10 (2.00 mm ) sieve).

4.5.2 Enter the desired time interval, pavement thickness, and voidless (Max.
Theoretical) density. (Based on Contractor’s or ARDOT Inspector’s Max. Sp.
Grav. result for sublot.)

4.5.3 Place the gauge on the surface of the asphalt choosing a smooth flat surface with
a minimum of voids for best results. The gauge should be aligned as in the
“6 o’clock” calibration position, with the source closer to the paving operation.
Check by placing a hand on opposite corners of the base of the gauge and
attempt to rock gauge.

4.5.4 Place the source rod in the "MEASURE" position and press the "START" key. At
the end of the count time, Density and Percent Voids or Percent Maximum
Density will be displayed.

4.5.5 Repeat the above procedure for each gauge reading.

4.6 Procedure – Density Testing Thin Lift Gauge (Surface Voids Mode)

146
November 2019

4.6.1 General - The Surface Voids (SV) Mode is recommended on mixes with less
than 40% fines (less than 40% passing the No. 10 (2.00 mm) sieve). In
normal use the SV Mode should be used by placing the gauge on the
magnesium standard block for readings. The 40% passing the No. 10 (2.00
mm) sieve is a guideline. This mode should not be used unless it is deemed
more accurate than the normal mode by correlating with drilled cores as per
the Note at the end of this test method.

4.6.2 Put the gauge in the Surface Void Mode.

4.6.3 Enter the desired time interval, pavement thickness, and void-less (Max.
Theoretical) density. (Determine according to Step 5.2.)

4.6.4 Place the magnesium standard block on top of the surface to be measured.
Place the gauge on top of the magnesium block choosing a relatively smooth
flat surface with a minimum of voids and check for rocking. The gauge should
be aligned as in the “6 o’clock” calibration position, with the source closer to
the paving operation. Place the source in the "MEASURE" position.

4.6.5 Press the "START" key to take a reading. When counting is finished, the SV
Density ("Surface Void Mode" Density) is calculated and displayed.
Thickness is not specified for the SV mode. The SV mode measures the top
1.5 to 2 inches (40 to 50 mm) of asphalt pavement.

4.6.5 Move the gauge to the next test location and press "START "to initiate the
next reading. Repeat this procedure for each gauge reading.

4.7 Direct Transmission Mode

4.7.1 Prepare the site in accordance with the procedure in step 4.4.1. Using a
crayon, mark the outline or footprint of the gauge. Use the guide/scraper
plate as a template and drill a hole to a depth of at least 0.28 in. (7 mm)
deeper than the measurement depth.

4.7.2 Place the gauge on the test site and lower the probe to a depth not to exceed
the thickness of the lift of pavement being measured. Position the gauge by
pulling it towards the scalar so that the probe is firmly against the side of the
hole.

4.7.3 Take a one-minute test and record (wet density).

4.7.4 Repeat the above procedure for each gauge reading.

______________________________________________________________________
147
November 2019

5. REPORT

5.1 Report Density to the nearest 0.1 lb./cu.ft. (1.6 kg/cu.m).

5.2 The percent compaction is based upon the Maximum Specific Gravity
(Rice) (Contractor’s or ARDOT Inspector’s Max. Sp. Grav. result for sublot)
and the average corrected gauge density.

Average Gauge Density

% Compaction = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max. Spec. Gravity (Rice) x 62.4 lb/cu.ft. (1000 kg/cu.m.)

Use the value for Max. Sp. Grav. most recently determined by testing as the
basis for calculating Max. Sp. Grav’s. (See example procedure at the end
of this Test Method).

5.3 Report the percent compaction to the nearest 0.1%.

5.4 Report the average of all compaction results (minimum of three) as the
percent (%) compaction for the test if:

A. All of the compaction results or two of three of the compaction results for
the sublot are equal to or greater than the minimum specified and are equal
to or less than the maximum specified (all results or two of three of the results
comply with specifications).

B. All of the compaction results for the sublot are below the minimum
specified or greater than the maximum specified (no results comply with
specifications).

C. If one or two of the compaction results for the sublot are below the
minimum specified or greater than the maximum specified and the remaining
compaction result/s are out of specification but in the opposite direction
determine the average compaction result by adding the arithmetic
differences between each compaction result and the minimum or maximum
specified. Average the sum and add to the minimum or maximum specified,
as appropriate, and report that value as the average of the compaction
results.

As an example, compaction results are: 91%, 97%, 90%; add the following:
1% (92%-91%), 1% (97%-96%), 2% (92%-90%);
the average is: 4% / 3 = 1.3%.
The reported average of the compaction results would be 90.7%
[(92%-1.3%)]

5.5 If two (2) of the sublot compaction results are below the minimum specified
or greater than the maximum specified report the average of these two non-
complying compaction results as the percent (%) compaction for the test.

148
November 2019

5.6 If one (1) of the sublot compaction results is more than 2% below the
minimum specified or more than 2% greater than the maximum specified
report this percent (%) compaction result as the percent (%) compaction for
the test. See Section 410,(b), (1) of the Standard Specifications.

Note:
1. A study performed by a state Department of Transportation
indicates that a thin lift gauge standardization procedure should be
performed only on an asphalt concrete surface course. The density of
magnesium is 109 lb/cu.ft. (1746 kg/ cu m) and this is the value (±2 lb/cu.ft.
(± 32 kg/cu m)) that should be obtained during the standardization of the
thin lift gauge.

2. If available on the thin lift gauge, the operators should utilize the
Special Calibration gauge function which allows the gauge to be specifically
calibrated by altering gauge constants for a particular asphalt concrete hot
mix. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer the special
calibration procedure should include a minimum of five (5) core densities and
twenty (20) gauge densities (4 gauge readings taken adjacent to each core).
Follow the manufacturer's recommended procedures for performing a
Special Calibration of the gauge.

149
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 464-07

Procedure for the Determination of Voids in Mineral

Aggregate (VMA) and Air Voids
______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for the determination of the

Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) and Air Voids. VMA
consists of all of the volume of the compacted mixture not occupied
by aggregate. This includes the volume occupied by both air voids
and the effective (non-absorbed) binder content. Air Voids consist
of the air pockets present between the binder coated aggregate
particles. Both Air Voids and VMA are expressed as a percent by
volume of the total volume of the compacted mixture.

______________________________________________________________________
3. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 Arkansas Department of Transportation Test Methods:

 ARDOT TM 449, Determination of Asphalt Content of Asphalt
Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
 ARDOT TM 449A, Calibration of Asphalt Content Gauge Troxler
3241-C

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 T 166, Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using
Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
 T 209, Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 T 269, Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
 T 308, Determining the Asphalt Binder Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt
(HMA) by the Ignition Method
 T 312, Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot-Mix Asphalt
(HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor

150
November 2019

_____________________________________________________________________
3. PROCEDURE

3.1 Asphalt mix samples shall be obtained from loaded truck at the asphalt
plant.

3.2 Perform sample preparation and testing as specified in the appropriate

AASHTO or ARDOT test method as listed in Section 2 Reference.
______________________________________________________________________
4. CALCULATION

4.1 VMA is calculated using the following formula:

VMA = VMAe – Correction Factor

Where:
VMAe = 100 – [(Gmb x Ps) / (Gse)]
Gse = Ps / [(100/Gmm) - (Pb/Gb)]

VMAe is “effective” VMA. Effective VMA is easier to determine than

“actual” VMA because it is calculated with Gse rather than Gsb. Gse can
be calculated using information that is already known, whereas
determining Gsb is a time consuming process. When effective VMA is
calculated, it must be adjusted to actual VMA using a correction factor.
This correction factor is the difference between the effective and actual
VMA determined in the mix design process.

VMA Correction Factor is shown on the mix design

Gmb is the bulk specific gravity of the compacted mixture. It shall be

determined by AASHTO T 166. Specimens used in this method shall
be prepared by AASHTO T 312. An average value obtained from two
specimens shall be used in this calculation.

Gmm is the maximum theoretical specific gravity of the asphalt mixture.

Gmm shall be determined by AASHTO T 209. An average value obtained
from two specimens shall be used in this calculation.

Pb is the amount of binder in the mixture expressed as a percentage of

the total weight of the mixture. Pb shall be determined by ARDOT TM
449/449A or AASHTO T 308.

Ps is the amount of aggregate in the mixture expressed as a percentage

of the total weight of mixture.
That is, Ps = 100 – Pb.

151
November 2019

Gse is the effective specific gravity of the aggregate.

Gb is the specific gravity of the asphalt binder at 77º F (25º C). This
value can be obtained from the asphalt binder shipping tickets.
Shipping tickets may show Specific Gravity at 60º F (15.6º C); to
convert to Specific Gravity at 77º F (25º C) multiply Specific Gravity
by 0.9941.

4.2 Air Voids are calculated using the following formula:

AV = 100 X [1-(Gmb/Gmm)]
Where:
Gmb and Gmm are as described above

______________________________________________________________________
5. REPORT

5.1 Report VMA and Air Voids to the nearest 0.1%.

152
November 2019

APPENDIX

Arkansas Department of Transportation

MATERIALS DIVISION
Little Rock, Arkansas
DETERMINATION of VOIDS IN MINERAL AGGREGATE(VMA)
and
AIR VOIDS
Report/SubLot No.: ______________ Date: ______________
Job No.:____________
F.A.P.: __________________________________________
Job Name: __________________________________________
Mix Design No.: ____________________
Type Mix: _________________________

Calculations:

Gmb1 = ______ Gmb2 = ______

Avg Gmb = (Gmb1 + Gmb2)/2 = ______

Gmm1 = ______ Gmm2 = ______

Avg Gmm = (Gmm1 + Gmm2)/2 = ______

Pb = ______ Ps = 100 – Pb = ______ Gb = ______

VMA Correction Factor = ______

Gse = Ps / [(100/Gmm) – (Pb/Gb)] = _____ / [(100/______ )-( ______ / _____ ) = ______

VMAe = 100 – [(Gmb X Ps) / (Gse)] = 100 – [( ______ X ______ ) / ( ______ )] = ______
VMA = VMAe – VMA Correction Factor = (______ - _____) = _____
AIR VOIDS = [1 – (Gmb / Gmm)] X 100 = [ 1- ( ______ / ______ )] X 100 = ______

REPORTED VMA = ______

REPORTED AIR VOIDS = ______

Tested by: ___________________________ CTTP No.:___________________

153
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 465-18 (Revised 11/2019)

Procedure for Sampling by Random Number

______________________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This procedure is used in obtaining random representative samples of

materials. Sample size is specified in the individual test method or in the
Sampling section of the “Manual of Field Sampling and Testing
Procedures”.

_____________________________________________________________________
2. DEFINITIONS

2.1 Lot: An isolated quantity of material from a single source. A measured

amount of construction assumed to be produced by the same process.
Examples of lots are: 1000 metric tons of Open Graded Portland Cement
Base Course or 3000 tons of asphalt concrete hot mix (ACHM).

2.2 Sublot: A portion of a Lot. Under some circumstances, a lot may be divided
into sublots for sampling purposes.

2.3 Sample: A small part of a Lot or a Sublot which represents the whole. A
sample may be made up of one or more increments or test portions.

2.4 Random: An occurrence that happens without aim or reason, depending

entirely on chance.

2.5 Random Number: A number selected entirely by chance as from a table of

random sampling numbers.

2.6 Random Number Table: A set of numbers chosen at random, by chance,

which are generated from an infinite population of numbers. Every digit has
an equal chance of occurrence.

154
November 2019

3. PROCEDURE A (Using Random Number Tables on projects let before

March 1, 2012). Procedure Deleted January 1, 2018 due to no active
projects that were let before March 1, 2012.

4. PROCEDURE B (Using SiteManager Random Number Generator on

projects let after March 1, 2012) Procedure Deleted March 30, 2018 due
to no active projects that were let before March 1, 2012.

5. PROCEDURE C (Using SiteManager Random Number Generator on

projects let after September 11, 2013.

Note: If the first sublot of the day is to be sampled do not use the
random location if the sample would be located in the first 5% of
the sublot; select another random number or random number
pair.

5.1 This procedure can be used when samples are to be obtained on the basis
of quantity or location. Random numbers are to be generated and viewed
using the SiteManager Access Reports System (SARS). Refer to the
SiteManager Users Guide located on the Department’s LAN at
\\csd4\construc\siteman\manuals for detailed instructions on how to
generate a random number.

5.1.2 Refer to the SiteManager Users Guide’s section on Random Number for
proper documentation requirements for adding comments, sample ID’s,
stations, offsets and remarks. The SiteManager Sample ID and test number
should be documented as a minimum in the Random Number Report (Final).

5.1.3 The resulting values will represent the quantity or location to be sampled
for each increment. If a Random Number is produced that places the sample
outside the specified limits, the sample should be moved as minimally as
possible to place the test within an acceptable sampling area.

5.1.3.1 On ACHM pavements, do not sample for density within 1.5 ft (0.5 m) of the
mat’s longitudinal joint or edge. No deviation in this sampling practice shall
be made regarding the presence of any underlying joint(s).

155
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 466-07

Test Method for the Verification of Slurry Seal

Calibration

________________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method provides a method for verifying the calibration of the mixing
machine used for slurry seal.

1.2 The mixing machine after calibration will be operated over a test strip, which
will be part of the project, for at least 500 feet or until continuous operation
of all aspects of slurry seal mixing are taking place.

______________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Arkansas Department of Transportation Test Methods:

 ARDOT TM 450, Method of Test for Extraction of Bituminous Mixtures
by the Vacuum Extractor

______________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.1 Two (2) one gallon plastic containers with handles

3.2 Large flat bottom pan approximately 2 feet by 2 feet with 2 inch sides

3.3 Extraction testing equipment-see ARDOT TM 450

______________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE

4.1 Upon achieving continuous operation of the mixing machine a sample of the
slurry mixture will be obtained by passing the gallon plastic container through
156
November 2019

the discharge stream. A second sample will be obtained after the mixing
machine has traveled an additional 100 feet. Both samples should fill the
gallon plastic containers at least half full.

4.2 After arriving at the field laboratory, the two samples will be washed out of
the containers, using sufficient water to remove all fines, into the flat bottom
pan.

4.3 The slurry material in the flat bottom pan will be dried at a low temperature,
no higher than approximately 150 F (65 C) until the free moisture is
evaporated.

4.4 The slurry material will then be poured onto a quartering cloth and quartered
until a sample of 1500 grams is obtained.

4.5 The residual asphalt content and gradation will be determined in accordance
with ARDOT TM 450.

4.6 Results of the extraction test will be compared with the mix design values. If
the test values are within the tolerance range of the mix design the slurry
mixing machine’s calibration is considered to be verified.

157
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 467-07

Test Method for Checking Slurry Seal Consistency

____________________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This test method provides a method for determining the percent of emulsion
and gradation of aggregate placed within a sublot or lot by the mixing
machine.

____________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 T 2, Sampling of Aggregates
 T 11, Materials Finer Than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing
 T 27, Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

International Slurry Surfacing Association

 A105 (Revised) February 2010, Recommended Performance Guidelines for
Emulsified Asphalt Slurry Seal

____________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.1 The proportioning devices are usually revolution counters or similar devices
and are used in material calibration and determining the material output at
any time.

____________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE

4.1 At the beginning and end of each sublot or lot selected by the Resident
Engineer the revolution counter will be read.

158
November 2019

4.2 Using calibration factors developed for the mix design to the nearest
hundredth, the quantity of emulsion and aggregate used within the sublot or
lot will be calculated and percent of emulsion determined.

4.3 An aggregate sample will be obtained from the project stockpile at a point in
time which will correspond to the time the revolution counter is read. Sample
in accordance with AASHTO T 2.

4.4 EXAMPLE

Revolution counter reading at beginning of sublot is 125.

Revolution counter reading at end of sublot is 210.
Number of revolutions in sublot is 210 - 125 = 85.
Using calibration factors:
4.1 lbs emulsion per revolution.
33.06 lbs dry aggregate per revolution.
From mix design
65% asphalt residue for each 100% of emulsion.
Calculation:
Aggregate: 85 rev x 33.06 lbs per rev = 2810.1 lbs.

Emulsion: 85 rev x 4.1 lbs per rev = 348.5 lbs.

% Residual Asphalt: (348.5 lbs / 2810.1 lbs) x 65% = 8.1%.

4.5 The aggregate is to be tested for gradation in accordance with

AASHTO T 11 and T 27.

159
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 470-09

Test Method for Asphalt Concrete Cold

Plant Mix
______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for determining a mix design for asphalt
concrete cold plant mixes.

______________________________________________________________________
2. APPARATUS

2.1 Mixing apparatus - Mechanical mixer and metal pan or bowl of sufficient
capacity. Hand mixing may also be used.

2.2 Oven - Thermostatically controlled to maintain required temperature.

2.3 Miscellaneous equipment such as thermometers, balances, spatulas,

brown paper, and gloves for handling hot equipment.

______________________________________________________________________
3. PROCEDURE

3.1 Determine mix aggregate gradation based upon the gradation limits in
Table 411-1 of Subsection 411.03 of the Department’s Standard
Specification for Highway Construction

3.2 Estimate the asphalt content through the following formula:

p = 0.03(a) + 0.07(b) + 0.2(c) + 0.215(d)
where:
p= Asphalt Content
a= percent of aggregate retained on the No.50 (0.300 mm) sieve,
b= percent of aggregate passing the No.50 (0.300 mm) sieve and
retained on the No.100 (0.150 mm),
160
November 2019

c= percent of aggregate passing the No.100 (0.150 mm) sieve and

retained on the No.200 (0.075 mm),
d= percent of aggregate passing the No.200 (0.075 mm) sieve

3.3 Blend aggregate fractions together based on the mix design.

3.3.1 Combine dry stockpile samples into a 10 lb. sample. Combine according to
stockpile cold feeds as determined in Step 3.1.

3.3.2 Sieve combined aggregate sample utilizing the ½”, #4, #8, and #50sieves.
Put the aggregate retained on the #4 sieve, the #8 sieve, the #50 sieve, and
the aggregate passing the #50 sieve in separate pans. Determine percent
(%) retained / passing for each sieve.

3.3.3 Combine aggregate from each pan into three combined aggregate samples;
the three combined aggregate samples should weigh 1000g less the weight
of the asphalt [1000 – estimated asphalt content, 1000 – (estimated asphalt
content – 0.5%), and 1000 – (estimated asphalt content + 0.5%)].

3.3.4 Aggregate from each of the pans (Step 3.3.2) should be added according to
the mix design and the percent (%) retained on each of the sieves (#4, #8,
and #50) and the percent (%) passing the #50 sieve.

3.4 Preheat asphalt, aggregate and mixing bowl. Preheat and mix specimens
according to the following temperatures or as recommended by the
manufacturer.

MC-250 40-95C(100-200F)
MC-800 85-120C(185-250F)
MC-3000 105-120C(225-250F)
Seasonal Type 40-80C(100-175F)

3.5 Mix three specimens of the cold mix with a mechanical mixer or by hand
mixing at a temperature which is at the midpoint of the design mixing
range. Each specimen shall be approximately 1000 grams (weighed to the
nearest 0.1 gram). One of the specimens shall contain asphalt content as
estimated in Step 3.2, p (Asphalt Content). One of the remaining two
specimens shall contain 0.5% less asphalt content(p - 0.5%) and the third
specimen shall contain 0.5% more asphalt content (p + 0.5%).

3.6 After mixing pour each specimen on a separate piece of brown paper
placed on a table or flat surface and spread so that the specimen is level
with the table or flat surface.

3.7 Let each specimen remain on paper undisturbed for 24 hours.

161
November 2019

____________________________________________________________________
4. DETERMINATION OF ASPHALT CONTENT

4.1 The necessary asphalt content is determined by manually testing each

specimen as follows:

4.1.1 Manually grasp and lift opposite sides of the brown paper so that the
specimen flows to the center of the paper. Then alternately raise and
lower each side of the paper so that the specimen is mixed back
together. Raise each of the opposite sides of the paper so that the
specimen is again in the center of the paper and set the paper and
specimen back on the table. The specimen should “crawl” or settle
slightly after being set back on the table.

4.1.2 Manually grasp a handful of the specimen and squeeze into a ball
and release pressure on the specimen. The specimen should remain
in a ball.

4.1.3 Examine the area of the brown paper where the specimen was setting
during the 24 hour period. The paper should show definite marks
where the mix had touched the paper; too much asphalt will show
some blotting or runoff of asphalt.

4.2 Determine desired asphalt content based on steps 4.1.1 through 4.1.2.

____________________________________________________________________
5. REPORT

5.1 Report desired asphalt content with aggregate gradation of the cold plant
mix. Asphalt content should be reported to the nearest tenth of a percent.

162
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 480-07

Test Method for Determining Rutting Susceptibility

Using a Loaded Wheel
Tester (LWT)

______________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method describes a procedure for testing the rutting susceptibility of
asphalt-aggregate mixtures using the Loaded Wheel Tester (LWT).

1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the standard. The
values given in parentheses are for information only.

1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any,
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to
establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the
applicability of regulations prior to use.

____________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 T 168 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 T 166 Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of
Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry
Specimens
 T 209 Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
 T 269 Standard Test Method for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense
and Open Bituminous Mixtures
 T 312 Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA)
Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor
 R 30, Mixture Conditioning of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)

2.2 APA Users Group—Determining Rutting Susceptibility Using the Asphalt

Pavement Analyzer (revised 1/14/2000)

163
November 2019

3. APPARATUS

3.1. Loaded Wheel Tester (LWT)-A thermostatically controlled device designed

to test the rutting susceptibility of hot mix asphalt by applying repetitive linear
loads to compacted test specimens through pressurized hoses.

3. 1.1 The LWT shall be thermostatically controlled to maintain the test

temperature and conditioning chamber at any setpoint between 4° C and 72°
C within 1° C (39° F and 162° F within 1° F).

3.1.2 The LWT shall be capable of independently applying loads up to 534 N (120
lbs.) to the three wheels. The loads shall be calibrated to the desired test
load by an external force transducer.

3.1.3 The pressure in the test hoses shall be adjustable and capable of
maintaining pressure up to 830 kPa (120 psi).

3. 1.4 The LWT shall be capable of testing six cylindrical specimens

simultaneously.

3.1.5 The LWT shall have a programmable master cycle counter which can be
preset to the desired number of cycles for a test. The LWT shall be capable
of automatically stopping the test at the completion of the programmed
number of cycles.

3.1.6 The hoses shall be Gates 77B Paint Spray and Chemical 19.0 mm (3/4 inch),
5.17 MPa (750 psi) W.P. GL 07148. The hoses should be replaced when
any of the outer rubber casings has worn through and threads are exposed.
Follow the LWT manufacturer's instructions for the technique on replacing
hoses.

3.2 Balance, 12,000 gram (30 lb.) capacity, accurate to 0.1 gram (0.0002 lb).

3.3 Mixing utensils (bowls, spoon, spatula)

3.4 Ovens for heating aggregate and asphalt cement.

3.5 Compaction (Superpave Gyratory Compactor, SGC) device and molds

____________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE

4.1 Preparation of Test Specimens

4.1.1 Number of test specimens - Two, four, or six cylindrical specimens, 150 mm
diameter x 75 mm (6 in diameter x 3 in. mm). Up to three tests of cylindrical
specimens may be performed during one test cycle.

164
November 2019

4.1.2 Roadway Core Specimens

4.1.2.1 Roadway core specimens shall be 150 mm diameter with all surfaces of the
perimeter perpendicular to the surface of the core within 5 mm (0.2 in.).
Cores shall be trimmed with a wet masonry saw to a height of 75 ± 3 mm
(3 ± 0.1 in). If the core has a height of less than 75 ± 3 mm (3 ± 0.1 in),
plaster of Paris may be used to achieve the proper height. Testing shall be
conducted on the uncut face of the core.

4.1.3 Plant Produced Mixtures

4.1.3.1 Samples of plant-produced mixtures shall be obtained in accordance with

AASHTO T 168. Mixture samples shall be reduced to the appropriate test
size and compacted while the mixture is still hot. Reheating of loose plant
mixture should be avoided.

4.1.3.2 Specimens shall be compacted according to paragraph 4.5.

4.1.4 Laboratory Prepared Mixtures

4.1.4.1 Mixture proportions are batched in accordance to the desired Job Mix
Formula.

4.1.4.2 The temperature to which the asphalt binder must be heated to achieve a
viscosity of 170 ±20 cSt shall be the mixing temperature. For modified
asphalt binders, use the mixing temperature recommended by the binder
manufacturer.

4.1.4.3 Dry mix aggregates and hydrated lime (when lime is used) first, then add
optimum percentage of asphalt cement. Mix the materials until all
aggregates are thoroughly coated.

4.1.4.4 Test samples shall be aged two hours at compaction temperature or in

accordance with the Mixture Conditioning for Volumetric Mixture Design in
AASHTO R 30-02.

4.1.4.5 The temperature to which the asphalt binder must be heated to achieve a
viscosity of 290 ± 30 cSt shall be the compaction temperature. For modified
asphalt binders, use the compaction temperature recommended by the
binder manufacturer. The mixture shall not be heated at the compaction
temperature for more than two hours.

4.1.4.6 Specimens shall be compacted according to paragraph 4.5.

4.1.5 Laboratory Compaction of Specimens

165
November 2019

4.1.5.1 One of several SGC’s may be used to compact specimens in the laboratory.
Details regarding the procedures for compacting specimens in each device
should be referenced to the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Dwell
shall be zero (0), no dwell.

4.1.5.2 Laboratory prepared specimens shall be compacted to contain 7.0 ± 1.0%

air voids and with a final height of 75 ± 5 mm (3 ± 0.1 in).

4.1.5.3 Compacted specimens should be left at room temperature, approximately

25° C (77° F) to allow the entire specimen to cool for a minimum of 3 hours.

4.2 Determining the Air Void Contents

4.2.1 Determine the bulk specific gravity of the test specimens in accordance with
AASHTO T 166.

4.2.2 Determine the maximum specific gravity of the test mixture in accordance
with AASHTO T 209.

4.2.3 Determine the air void contents of the test specimens in accordance with
AASHTO T 269.

4.3 Selecting the Test Temperature

4.3.1 The test temperature shall be set to 64º C (147º F) unless otherwise
specified.

4.4 Specimen Preheating

4.4.1 Place the specimens in the molds.

4.4.2 Specimens shall be preheated at the test temperature, 64º C (147º F)

(unless otherwise specified) in the temperature calibrated LWT test chamber
or in a separate calibrated oven for a minimum of 4 hours. Specimens should
not be held at elevated temperatures for more than 24 hours prior to testing.

4.5 Procedure (Main)

4.5.1 Set the hose pressure gage reading to 700 ± 35 kPa (100 ± 5 psi). Set the
load cylinder pressure reading for each wheel to achieve a load of 445
± 22 N (100 ± 5 lb.).

4.5.2 Stabilize the testing chamber temperature at the test temperature selected
in Paragraph 6.

4.5.3 Secure the preheated, molded specimens in the LWT. The preheated LWT
chamber should not be opened more than 6 minutes when securing the test
specimens into the machine. Close the chamber doors and allow 10 minutes
for the temperature to re-stabilize prior to starting the test.
166
November 2019

4.5.4 Apply 25 cycles to seat the specimens before the initial measurements.
Make adjustments to the hose pressure as needed during the 25 cycles.

4.5.5 Open the chamber doors, unlock and pull out the sample holding tray (Steps
4.5.5 – 4.5.12 are to be followed if a manual determination of rut depths is to
be obtained.).

4.5.6 Place the rut depth measurement template over the specimen. Make sure
that the rut depth measurement template is properly seated and firmly rests
on top of the testing mold.

4.5.7 Zero the digital measuring gauge so that the display shows 0.00 mm with
the gauge completely extended. The display should also have a bar below
the "inc." position. Take initial readings at each of the five locations on the
template. (For cylindrical specimens, the center measurement is not used).
Measurements shall be determined by placing the digital measuring gauge
in the template slots and sliding the gauge slowly across each slot. Record
the smallest measurement for each location to the nearest 0.01 mm (0.0004
in.).

4.5.8 Repeat steps 4.5.6 and 4.5.7 for each beam or set of cylinders in the testing
position. All measurements shall be completed within six minutes.

4.5.9 Push the sample holding tray in and secure. Close the chamber doors and
allow 10 minutes for the temperature to equalize.

4.5.10 Set the PRESET COUNTER to the number of test cycles.

4.5.11 Start the test. When the test reaches the number of cycles set on the counter
(8000 cycles unless otherwise specified), the LWT will stop and the load
wheels will automatically retract.

4.5.12 Repeat steps 4.5.5 to 4.5.11 as necessary to take final readings.

Note: Some Loaded Wheel Testers have been equipped with automatic
measurement systems which makes steps 4.5.5 through 4.5.11 unnecessary.
Some users have reported significant differences in rut depths between the
automatic measurements and manual measurements.

______________________________________________________________________
5. CALCULATIONS

5.1 The rut depth at each location is determined by subtracting the final
measurement from the initial measurement.
Note: Some Loaded Wheel Tester have been equipped with automatic
measurement systems which makes steps 4.5.5 through 4.5.11 unnecessary.

5.2 Determine the average rut depth for each test position. For cylindrical
specimens, use the average of all four measurements to calculate the average
rut depth.
167
November 2019

5.3 Calculate the average rut depth from the three test positions. Also, calculate the
standard deviation for the three test positions.

5.4 Outlier evaluation – When testing two specimens, if the rut depths vary more
than 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) from each other, the results may be discarded and new
specimens prepared and tested. If four or more cylindrical specimens are tested
and the standard deviation for the set is greater than or equal to 2.0 mm (0.08
in.), then the position with the rut depth farthest from the average may be
discarded. The testing procedure, device calibration, and test specimens
should be investigated to determine the possible causes for the excessive
variation.

5.5 The LWT rut depth for the mixture is the average of two, four, or six cylindrical
specimens.

6. Reporting

6.1 The test report shall include the following information:

6.1.1 The laboratory name, technician name, and date of test.

6.1.2 The mixture type and description.

6.1.3 Specimen type.

6.1.4 Average air void content of the test specimens.

6.1.5 The test temperature.

6.1.6 The average rut depths to the nearest 0.1 mm (0.04 in.) at 8000 cycles.

____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEX
A. CALIBRATION
(For Pavement Technology, Inc. (PTI) Asphalt Pavement Analyzer)

The following items should be checked for calibration no less than once per
year: (1) preheating oven, (2) LWT temperature, (3) LWT wheel load, and
(4) LWT hose pressure. Instructions for each of these calibration checks are
included in this section.
____________________________________________________________________
Al. Temperature calibration of the preheating oven.

Al.l The preheating oven must be calibrated with a NIST traceable thermometer
(an ASTM 65C calibrated thermometer is recommended) and a metal
thermometer well to avoid rapid heat loss when checking the temperature.

Al.2 Temperature Stability

168
November 2019

Al.2.l Set the oven to the chosen temperature, 64º C (147º F). Place the
thermometer in the well and place them on the center of the shelf where the
samples and molds will be preheated. It usually takes an hour or so for the
oven chamber, well and thermometer to stabilize. After one hour, open the
oven door and read the thermometer without removing it from the well.
Record this temperature. Close the oven door.

A1.2.2 Thirty minutes after obtaining the first reading, obtain another reading of the
thermometer. Record this temperature. If the readings from step A2.l and
A2.2 are within 0.4º C (0.8º F), then average the readings. If the readings
differ by more than 0.4º C (0.8º F), then continue to take readings every thirty
minutes until the temperature stabilizes within 0.4º C (0.8º F), on two
consecutive readings.

A1.3 Temperature Uniformity

A1.3.1 To check the uniformity of the temperature in the oven chamber, move the
thermometer and well to another location in the oven so that they are on a
shelf where samples and molds will be preheated, but as far as possible from
the first location. Take and record readings of the thermometer at the second
location every thirty minutes until two consecutive readings at the second
location are within 0.4º C (0.8º F).

A1.3.2 Compare the average of the two readings at the first location with the
average of the stabilized temperature at the second location. If the average
temperatures from the two locations are within 0.4º C (0.8º F), then the oven
temperature is relatively uniform and it is suitable for use preheating LWT
samples. If the average of the readings at the two locations differ by more
than 0.4º C (0.8º F), then you must find another oven that will hold this level
of uniformity and meets calibration.

A1.4 Temperature Accuracy

A1.4.1 Average the temperatures from the two locations. If that average
temperature is within 0.4 º C of the set point temperature on the oven, then
the oven is reasonably accurate and calibration is complete.

A1.4.2 If the set point differs from the average temperature by more than 0.4º
C (0.8º F), then adjust the oven set point appropriately to raise or lower the
temperature inside the chamber so that the thermometer and well will be at
the desired temperature, 64º C (147º F),

A1.4.3 Place the thermometer and well in the center of the shelf. At thirty-minute
intervals, take readings of the thermometer. When two consecutive readings
are within 0.4º C, and the average of the two consecutive readings are within
0.4º C of the desired test, 64º C (147º F), then the oven has been properly
adjusted and calibration is complete. If these two conditions are not met,
then repeat steps A1.4.2 and A1.4.3.

169
November 2019

A2 LWT Temperature Calibration

A2.1 The LWT must be calibrated with a NIST traceable thermometer (an ASTM
65C calibrated thermometer is recommended) and a metal thermometer well
to avoid rapid heat loss when checking the temperature.

A2.2 Temperature Stability

A2.2.1 Turn on the LWT main power and set the chamber
temperature controller so that the temperature inside the testing chamber is
about 64º C (147º F). Also, set the water temperature controller to achieve
approximately 64º C (147º F) water temperature. Place the thermometer in
the well and place them on the left side of the shelf where the samples and
molds will be tested. (Note-it may be helpful to remove the hose rack from
the LWT during temperature calibration to avoid breaking the thermometer.)

A2.2.2 It usually takes about five hours for the LWT to stabilize. After the
temperature display on the controller has stabilized open the chamber doors
and read the thermometer without removing it from the well. Record this
temperature. Close the chamber doors.

A2.2.3 Thirty minutes after obtaining the first reading, obtain another reading of the
thermometer. Record this temperature. If the readings from step A2.2.2 and
A2.2.3 are within 0.4º C (0.8º F), then average the readings. If the readings
differ by more than 0.4º C (0.8º F) then continue to take readings every thirty
minutes until the temperature stabilizes within 0.4º C (0.8º F) on two
consecutive readings.

A2.3 Temperature Uniformity

A2.3.1 To check the uniformity of the temperature in the LWT chamber, move the
thermometer and well to the right side of the shelf where the samples are
tested Take and record readings of the thermometer at the second location
every thirty minutes until two consecutive readings at the second location
are within 0.4º C (0.8º F).

A2.3.2 Compare the average of the two readings at the left side with the average of
the stabilized temperature at the right side. If the average temperatures from
the two locations are within 0.4º C (0.8º F), then the LWT temperature is
relatively uniform and it is suitable for use. If the average of the readings at
the two locations differ by more than 0.4º C (0.8º F) then consult with the
manufacturer on improving temperature uniformity .

A2.4 Temperature Accuracy

A2.4.1 Average the temperatures from the two locations. If that average
temperature is within 0.4º C (0.8º F) of the desired temperature of 64º
C (147º F),then the LWT temperature is reasonably accurate and calibration
is complete.

170
November 2019

A2.4.2 If the average temperature differs from the desired temperature of 64º
C (147º F) by more than 0.4º C (0.8º F), then adjust the LWT temperature
controller so that the thermometer and well will be at the desired temperature
of 64º C (147º F).

A2.4.3 Place the thermometer and well in the center of the shelf. At thirty-minute
intervals, take readings of the thermometer. When two consecutive readings
are within 0.4º C (0.8º F), and the average of the two consecutive readings
are within 0.4º C (0.8º F) of the desired test temperature of 64º C (147º F),
then the LWT temperature has been properly adjusted and calibration at that
temperature is complete. Record the current set points on the temperature
controllers for later reference. If these two conditions are not met, then repeat
steps A2.4.2 and A2.4.3.

A3 LWT Wheel Load calibration of the air cylinders at the three test positions

A3.1 The LWT wheel loads will be checked with the calibrated load cell provided
with the LWT The loads will be checked and adjusted one at a time while the
other wheels are in the down position and bearing on a dummy sample or
wooden block of approximately the same height as a test sample. Calibration
of the wheel loads should be accomplished with the LWT at room
temperature. A sheet is provided to record the calibration loads.

A3.1.l Remove the hose rack from the LWT

A3.l.2 Jog the wheel carriage until the wheels are over the center of the sample
tray when the wheels are in the down position. Do not lock sample tray in
place.

A3.1.3 Raise and lower the wheels 20 times to heat up the cylinders.

A3.1.4 Adjust the bar on top of the load cell by screwing it in or out until the total
height of the load cell-load bar assembly is 105 mm (4.1 in.).

A3.1.5 Position the load cell under one of the wheels. Place wooden blocks or
dummy samples under the other two wheels. (Alternatively, place two empty
specimen molds, inverted, under the other two wheels.)

A3.1.6 Zero the load cell.

A3.1.7 Lower all wheels by turning the cylinder switch to CAL.

A3.1.8 lf the load cell is not centered left to right beneath the wheel, then raise the
wheel and adjust the position of the load cell. To determine if the load cell is
centered front to back beneath the wheel, unlock the sample tray and move
it SLOWLY until the wheel rests in the indention on the load cell bar (where
the screw is located).

171
November 2019

A3.1.9 After the load cell has been properly centered, adjust the pressure in the
cylinder to obtain 445 ± 5 N (100 ± 1 lbs). Allow three minutes for the load
cell reading to stabilize between adjustments. Record the pressure and the
load.

A3.1.10 With the wheel on the load cell remaining in the down position, raise and
lower the other wheels one time. Allow three minutes for the load cell reading
to stabilize. Record the pressure and the load.

A3.1.11 With the other wheels remaining in the down position, raise and lower the wheel
over the load cell. Allow three minutes for the load cell reading to stabilize.
Record the pressure and the load.

A3.1.12 Repeat steps A3.l.5 through A.3.1.11 for each wheel/cylinder.

A3.1.13 Return the load cell to the first wheel and repeat steps A3.1.5 through A3.1.11

A3.l.14 Place the load cell under the second wheel and repeat steps A3.1.5 through
A3.1.11. A3.l.15 Place the load cell under the third wheel and repeat steps
A3.1.5 through A3.1.11. The current cylinder pressures will be used to set wheel
loads to 100 Lbs.

______________________________________________________________________
A4 Replacement of the LWT hoses.

A4.1 New hoses shall be placed in service in accordance with 3.1.6.

A4.1.1 Remove the hose rack from the LWT.

A4.1.2 Remove the used hoses from the hose rack. Place the new hoses on the barbed
nipples and secure with the hose clamps.

A4.1.3 Position the hoses in the rack such that the hose curvature is vertical. Tighten
the nuts at the ends of the hoses only until the hoses are secure. Over-tightening
will affect the contact pressure and hose life.

A4.1.4 Place the hose rack back into the LWT and make sure that the hoses are aligned
beneath the wheels.

A4.1.5 Prior to testing, break in the new hoses by running 8000 cycles on a set of
previously tested samples at a temperature of 55º C (131º F) or higher.
______________________________________________________________________
A5 LWT Hose Pressure Check

A5.1 The air pressure in the LWT test hoses shall rechecked with a NIST traceable
test gauge or transducer with a suitable range. The check shall be made while
the LWT is operating. Since the hoses are connected in series, it is satisfactory
to connect the test gauge to the end of the right-most hose. The pressure should
not fluctuate outside of the range of 690 ± 35 kPa (100 ± 3 psi) during normal
operation. Adjust the pressure as necessary with the hose pressure regulator.
172
November 2019

Note: The Ashcroft test gauge model 450182As02L200# has been found to be
satisfactory for this purpose. This gauge may be available through Grainger
(Stock No. 2F008).

173
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 481-07

Test Method for

Open Graded Asphalt Base Course
_____________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for determining asphalt content of an

Open Graded Asphalt Base Course.

____________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
▪ T 209, Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
▪ R 30, Mixture Conditioning of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)

____________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS

3.1 Balance – with ample capacity, and with sufficient sensitivity to enable the
specific gravity of samples of uncompacted paving mixtures to be calculated
to at least four significant figures.

3.2 Mixing apparatus - Mechanical mixer and metal pan or bowl of sufficient
capacity. Hand mixing may also be used.

3.3 Oven - Thermostatically controlled to maintain required temperature.

3.4 Miscellaneous equipment such as a mechanical mixer or mixing tool,

thermometers, balances, spatulas, metal containers, brown paper, and
gloves for handling hot equipment.

3.5 Water bath – for immersing the specimen / Rice container in water while
suspended under the balance. It shall be equipped with an overflow
outlet for maintaining a constant water level

3.6 Vacuum container, vacuum pump, residual pressure manometer (or

vacuum gauge traceable to NIST) and related equipment described in
AASHTO T 209, “Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures”.
174
November 2019

4. PROCEDURE

4.1 Determine the aggregate gradation to insure compliance with gradation

requirements (Types 1 - 4) in Section 417 of the Department’s Standard
Specification for Highway Construction, Edition of 2003..

4.2 Based on the aggregate gradation, prepare two aggregate samples (see
Appendix) and place in oven at 325 F (163 C) until thoroughly heated.
(Total mineral aggregate, TMA, will vary depending on % asphalt cement
requirement for Types 1-4 OGBC – see below). Mix with % of asphalt
cement that is midpoint of requirement for Types 1-4 (i.e.: 2.75% for Type
4) and mix at 300 F (149 C) until properly coated. Total weight of the
specimen should be 2000 grams.
Example:
TMA = 1945 grams

AC = 55 grams

Total Wt. = 2000 grams

Note: Type 4 OGBC is required and % asphalt cement is 2.5%–3.0%.

55 grams of asphalt cement is 2.75% (midpoint).

4.3 Determine theoretical maximum specific gravity (Rice) of both specimens.

One specimen to be cured or conditioned according to AASHTO R-30
“Mixture Conditioning of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)” before testing (Gmmc) and
the other specimen to be tested uncured or unconditioned (Gmmu). The
specific gravity (Gb) of the asphalt cement must also be known.

Example:
Gmmu = 2.462
Gmmc = 2.485
Gb = 1.036

100 / 2.462 = 40.617

100 / 2.485 = 40.241
40.617 – 40.241 = 0.376
Absorbed asphalt binder = 0.376 * 1.036 = 0.389
Optimum asphalt binder content = 2.75 + 0.389 = 3.139
_____________________________________________________________________
5. REPORT

5.1 Report optimum asphalt binder content (in this example, 3.1%) and
effective asphalt binder content (2.75%)

175
 November 2019

APPENDIX

OPEN GRADED BASE COURSE BATCH SHEET

OGBC TYPE _IV____

% AC
SIEVE JOB MIX 2.75
75.0MM(3")
63.0MM(2.5")
50.0MM(2")
37.5MM(1.5")
25MM(1") 0
19MM(3/4") 0 0
12.5MM(1/2") 30 584
9.5MM(3/8") 56 1089
4.75MM(#4) 96 1867
2.36MM(#8) 98 1906
0.150MM(#100)
TMA<MF
MF
TMA 1945
AC WT. 55
TOTAL WT. 2000

SAMPLE # COLD FEED WT. LAB #

JOB #
AC
BRAND
AC PG 64-22
GRADE
TOTALS 100 15

MIX 2 SAMPLES FOR RICE

RUN 1 UNCURED
CURE SAMPLE #2 IN OVEN FOR 2 HOURS

176
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 490-10

Test Method for Petrographic Analysis of Non-

Carbonate Aggregate

1. SCOPE

This test method provides a procedure for determination of percentage, by

weight, of material that is non-carbonate.

2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.2 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
 M 92 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
 M 231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials
 T 2 Sampling of Aggregates
 T 11 Materials Finer Than (No. 200) 75-µm Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing
 T 248 Reducing Sample of Aggregate to Testing Size

3. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE

This test method is of primary significance in determining the

acceptability of aggregate for use in meeting the requirements of Section
409 of the Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

4. APPARATUS

4.1 Balance - The balance shall have sufficient capacity, be readable to 0.1 gram
and conform to the requirements of M 231.
4.2 Sieves - Sieves conforming to M 92.
4.3 Oven - An oven providing free circulation of air and
capable of maintaining a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C).

5. PROCEDURE

177
November 2019

5.1 Obtain a representative sample of the aggregate in accordance with

AASHTO T 2 and T 248 in order to obtain a final weight after sieving as
specified Section 5.4.

5.2 The sample shall be washed over the No. 200 (0.075mm) sieve in
accordance with AASHTO T 11.

5.3 Dry the sample to constant mass at a temperature of 230 ± 9°F (110± 5°C),
allow to cool, and determine the mass of the sample to the nearest 0.1 gram.

5.4 The sample shall be sieved over the 3/4 inch (19.0mm) and the Number 8
(2.36mm) sieves. Discard the material retained on the 3/4 inch (19.0mm)
sieve and material passing the Number 8 (2.36mm) sieve. The test shall be
performed on the coarse fraction retained on the No. 8 (2.36mm) sieve. A
representative specimen shall be selected by quartering or splitting so as to
obtain, after quartering / splitting, a minimum 1000 grams.

5.5 Spread the aggregate specimen out on a large sheet of heavy paper on a
work table so that individual particles can be carefully examined.

5.6 By visual and physical classification, separate the carbonate material from
non-carbonate material. Any particle that is a composition particle will be
considered as carbonate material. Make visual observations of conchoidal
fractures (aggregate surface breaks with curved concavities) for each
particle which provides an indication of non-carbonate material. A
magnifying glass may be helpful to examine the aggregate surface. Conduct
a physical test by holding an aggregate piece and physically attempting to
scratch a glass plate. Chert and other silica material will be harder than a
glass surface. Limestone is softer and will not scratch the glass surface.

5.7 Obtain weight of non-carbonate material removed from the aggregate

specimen.

5.8 Determine insoluble content of non-carbonate material using ARDOT Test

Method 306. Non-carbonate material shall have an insoluble residue of not
less than 85%. If non-carbonate material has insoluble residue less than
85%, then report specimen as being all carbonate material.

178
November 2019

6.0 CALCULATION

6.1 The non-carbonate particles shall be weighed.

6.2 The percentage of the non-carbonate particles present shall be calculated to

the nearest 0.1 percent by dividing the weight of the non-carbonate particles
by the weight of the representative specimen obtained in 5.4, and multiplying
by 100.

C = (A / B) X 100

where:
A = weight of non-carbonate particles

B = weight of representative specimen (portion quartered /

split) from that retained on No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve.

C = percentage of non-carbonate particles

(Round to nearest whole percent)

7.0 Report

7.1 Refer to Form 1 TM-490 for reporting test results.

7.2 Refer to Form 2 TM-490 for Maintaining History of Quarry Products.

179
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 490

Standard Form For Reporting Petrographic Analysis
Of Non-Carbonate Aggregate (Chert Count)

Producer/Supplier Name: Aggregate Type:

Quarry Location: Aggregate Size:
Approved Minimum % Chert: Formation Name:

ARDOT
Test
Total Method
Dry Wt. Of 306
Quantity Wt. Of Non- Insoluble
Date Sample Represented Sample Carbonate % Chert Residue CTTP
Tested Lab Number Location (Tons) (B) Rock (A) (A/B)*100 (%) Pass/Fail Technician # Signature

ARDOT Form 1- TM-490

180
November 2019

Quarry Production Log

Producer/Supplier Name: Aggregate Type:

Quarry Location: Aggregate Size:
Approved Minimum % Chert: Formation Name:

Total Total
Quarry Quantity
Production Shipped To
Of This This Job
Product Number CTTP
Month (Tons) ARDOT Job Number (Tons) Comments Technician #

ARDOT Form 2- TM-490

181
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 530-07

Test Method for the Comparison of Fine Aggregate

Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortar

____________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This method provides a procedure for determining the compressive strength
of cubes made with a fine aggregate and comparing it to the compressive
strength of cubes made with a standard sand in the same cement mortar.
Portland cement will be used in the method.

___________________________________________________________________________________
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

2.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO) Standards:
• T 106, Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
• T 162, Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes
and Mortars of Plastic Consistency

American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C 778, Specification for Standard Sand

____________________________________________________________________
3. APPARATUS AND MATERIALS

3.1 As outlined and referenced in AASHTO T 106

3.2 Sample—Fine aggregate sample shall be dry.

3.3 Materials for Compressive Strength—Standard Sand (ASTM C 778):

Graded 20-30-Ottawa

3.4 Temperature and Humidity—As outlined in AASHTO T 106

3.5 Test Specimens—Three compressive strength cubes of the fine aggregate

sample and three compressive strength cubes of the standard sand sample.

______________________________________________________________________
4. PROCEDURE
182
November 2019

4.1 Preparation of Specimen Mold—As detailed in AASHTO T 106

4.1.1 Procedure for Mixing Mortars—As detailed in AASHTO T 106

4.2 Procedure for Compressive Strength Test—As detailed in AASHTO T 106.

Cure specimens for seven (7) days

______________________________________________________________________
5. CALCULATION

5.1 Calculate compressive strengths as in AASHTO T 106

5.2 Divide the average compressive strength of the three fine aggregate
specimens by the average compressive strength of the standard sand
specimens. The average compressive strength of the fine aggregate
specimens shall have an average compressive strength of 95% of the
average compressive strength of the standard sand specimens at 7 days.

______________________________________________________________________
6. REPORT

6.1 Report percentage (%) to the nearest whole number.

183
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 588-07

Procedure for Combining Aggregate Gradations

______________________________________________________________________________
1. SCOPE

1.1 This procedure is designed to be used when the aggregate gradations for
a portland cement concrete (PCC) mix must be mathematically combined
to create a theoretical combined gradation. This combined gradation is
based on the relative percent volume in the mix.

1.2 Each individual aggregate is sampled and tested individually. Each

gradation shall start with the largest appropriate sieve for that material and
shall include all the consecutive smaller sieve sizes through the #200
sieve. They shall include: 1½ in. (37.5 mm), 1 in. (25 mm), ¾ in. (19 mm),
½ in. (12.5 mm), 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), #4 (4.75 mm), #8 (2.36 mm), #16 (1.18
mm), #30 (0.600 mm), #50 (0.300mm), #100 (0.150 mm), and #200
(0.075 mm) sieves.

________________________________________________________________
2. PROCEDURE

2.1 The following steps outline the procedure to be used to determine this
combined gradation:

2.1.1 The percent volume of each of the aggregates is determined from the volume
proportions of the mix design. The relative proportion of each aggregate of
the total aggregate is determined by dividing the individual aggregate
portion in the mix by the total aggregate portion in the mix.

Example:

A mixture design has the following mix proportions by volume:

Cement 0.115
Water 0.163
Entrained Air 0.060
Fine Aggregate 0.272
Coarse Aggregate 0.390

Total 1.000

The total aggregate portion is: 0.272 + 0.390 = 0.662

184
November 2019

The relative portion for each aggregate by volume is determined as follows:

Fine Aggregate (0.272/0.662) = 0.411

Coarse Aggregate (0.390/0.662) = 0.589

Check the total aggregate relative portions. They should equal 1.000.

2.1.2 These volume proportions are then adjusted by the specific gravity of the
aggregates, since gradations are based on percent weight retained on each
sieve. The relative weight is determined by multiplying each aggregate’s
volume proportion by its specific gravity. These relative weights are then
summed to obtain a total weight. The proportion by weight is then determined
by dividing each aggregate’s relative weight by the total weight.

Example:
Aggregate Proportion Specific Relative Proportion
By Volume Gravity Weight By Weight

Fine 0.411 2.61 1.07271 (1.07271/2.62767)= 0.408

Coarse 0.589 2.64 1.55496 (1.55496/2.62767)= 0.592
Total 1.000 2.62767

2.1.3 For each individual aggregate gradation multiply the percent retained on
each sieve by the proportion by weight. This is the Adjusted % Retained.

Example:

Coarse Aggregate

Sieve % Retained Relative Adjusted

Inch (mm) Volume % Retained
1½ (37.5) 0.0 0.592 0.0
1 (25.0) 8.1 0.592 4.8
¾ (19.0) 23.0 0.592 13.6
½ (12.5) 37.6 0.592 22.3
3/8 (9.5) 19.0 0.592 11.2
No. 4 (4.75) 9.3 0.592 5.5
No. 8 (2.36) 1.8 0.592 1.1
No. 16 (1.18) 0.5 0.592 0.3
No. 30 (0.600) 0.1 0.592 0.1
No. 50 (0.300) 0.2 0.592 0.1
No. 100 (0.150) 0.1 0.592 0.1
No. 200 (0.075) 0.1 0.592 0.1
Minus 200 (0.075) 0.2 0.592 0.1

Similar calculations are done for the fine aggregate.

185
 November 2019

2.1.4 Determine the theoretical combined gradation from the individual gradations by
totaling the percent retained of all aggregates for each sieve size. This is the
theoretical combined percent retained for each sieve. The total of these
percents retained should equal 100.0. If the total is off due to rounding,
prorate the rounding error. The theoretical combined gradation, percent
passing, may be calculated by subtracting the cumulative % retained for
each sieve, beginning with 100. The following table shows the calculations:

Sieve Coarse Fine Theoretical Prorated %Retained Theoretical

Inch (mm) Aggregate Aggregate Combined % Ret’d Cumulative Combined
Gradation Gradation
% Retained % Passing

1½ (37.5) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 100

1 (25.0) 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 95.2
¾ (19.0) 13.6 13.6 13.7 18.5 81.5
½ (12.5) 22.3 22.3 22.4 40.9 59.1
3/8 (9.5) 11.2 0.0 11.2 11.2 52.1 47.9
No. 4 (4.75) 5.5 2.0 7.5 7.5 59.6 40.4
No. 8 (2.36) 1.1 4.1 5.2 5.2 64.8 35.2
No. 16 (1.18) 0.3 5.6 5.9 5.9 70.7 29.3
No. 30(0.600) 0.1 12.9 13.0 13.1 83.8 16.2
No. 50(0.300) 0.1 12.0 12.1 12.2 96.0 4.0
No. 100 (0.150) 0.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 99.2 0.8
No. 200(0.075) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 99.5 0.5
Minus 200 0.1 0.4 0.5 0.5 100.0 0.0
(0.075)
Total 99.6 100.0

The theoretical combined gradations are used in graphically displaying

aggregate blends of PCC mixture designs and for plotting 0.45 power control
charts to compare target gradation with working ranges of the mix design.

186
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 701A-15

Test Method for

Flexibility of Traffic Paint

ARDOT Test Method 701A-15 is equivalent to ASTM D2205-85 (2010), Elongation,

except for the following provisions:

1. Replace references to ASTM D1737 with ASTM D522.

2. Allow test specimen to air dry 18-24 hours, bake 2 hours at 122  3.6 F (50 
2 C), and cool before conducting the test with a 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) mandrel.

187
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 701D-15

Test Method for

Water Resistance
of Traffic Paint

ARDOT Test Method 701D-15 is equivalent to ASTM D2205-85 (2010), Water

Resistance, except for the following provisions:

3. ASTM D1647 Method A shall be used with the exceptions as stated in D2205
using a 15 mil (380 µm) wet film.

188
November 2019

ARDOT Test Method 701G-15

Test Method for

Contrast Ratio of Traffic Paint

ARDOT Test Method 701G-15 is equivalent to ASTM D2205-85 (2010), Hiding

Power, except for the following provisions:

4. Replace references to Procedure A, Method 4121 of U.S. Federal Test Method

Standard 141B with ASTM D2805.

189
November 2019

MATERIAL CERTIFICATION FOR JOB DOCUMENTATION

The items on the following list may be approved by the Resident Engineer as to
compliance with the specifications and/or quantities.

1. Dumped Riprap
2. Quarry run stone fill
3. Agricultural lime (at option of Resident Engineer,
samples may be submitted for testing).
4. Vehicular Gates
5. Fencing (Material from an approved suppliers and at
option of Resident Engineer, samples submitted for testing).
6. Metal Slab Bolsters
7. Metal High Chairs

NOTE: Metal high chairs and slab bolsters in contact with exterior surfaces of
concrete shall be galvanized, stainless steel, or have plastic coated tips. If the tips are
plastic coated, the coating must cover all parts of the leg within 1/2 inch of the concrete
surface. Proper dimensions and type of coating should be determined for each of the
two items prior to certification of these materials.

8. Mulch Cover
9. Traffic Signal Equipment (Traffic Division approves the proposed equipment and
forwards to the Resident Engineer for job approval).
a. Actuated Controllers
b. Vehicle Detectors
c. Traffic Signal Heads
d. Pedestrian Signal Boxes
e. Luminaire Assemblies
f. Electrical Wire
g. Ground Rod
h. Conduit
Span wire support poles, traffic signal mast arms and poles, and traffic signal
pedestal poles, and anchors and connection hardware(Std. Spec. Sections
712, 714, and 715) are certified by a Professional Engineer.

10. Traffic Control Devices (Temporary Construction Signing) will be accepted by

the Department on the basis of a certificate from the Contractor as to their full
compliance with the specifications and a visual inspection as to their effectiveness and
condition.
Items included under Traffic Control Devices are:
Signs
Barricades
Traffic Drums
Precast Concrete Barrier
Temporary Pavement Markings (Excluding Paint)
Temporary Pavement Markings

190
November 2019

11. Impact Attenuation Barriers

12. Crash Cushions
13. Automatic Flood Gates
14. Liquid Asphalt for Prime, Tack, and Asphalt in Bituminous SurfaceTreatment.
15. Fly Ash.
16. Ground granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
17. Modified Portland Cement.
18. Portland Cement.

The above is a list of common items for R.E. approval. However, there may be some
unusual items not listed which require certification. If you have any questions, please
contact the Materials Division.

METHOD OF DOCUMENTATION OF ACCEPTANCE: The Resident Engineer shall

complete Materials Form 170 to the extent necessary to document the approval of
common materials. One copy of the Form is retained in the project file.

191
November 2019

Sample Form M 170

Date: _______________________

TO: Job File

FROM: ___________________________, Resident Engineer
Job _____________, Miscellaneous Materials Certification

I hereby certify that the materials listed below in the quantity shown conform to or exceed the material specification required by the
Standard Specifications and/or Special Provisions and/or Plans.

ABS /PVC Pipe for Underdrain Laterials: ---L. F.

Agricultural Lime: -------------------------- Tons
Blotter Course: ------------------------------ C. Y. or Tons
Dumped Riprap: ---------------------------- C. Y. or Tons
Erosion Matting Staples: --------------- Each
Fencing (Type C & D): ------------------- L. F.
Gabion Stone: ------------------------------ C. Y. or Tons
High Chairs: --------------------------------- Each
Mail Boxes and Hardware: ------------ Each
Mulch Cover: ------------------------------- Acres
Mulch Netting: ----------------------------- Sq. Yd.
Rock Butress: --------------------------------- C. Y. or Tons
Quarry Run Stone Fill: ---------------------- Tons
Slab Bolsters: -------------------------------- L. F.
Sod Mulch: ----------------------------------- C. Y.
Solid Sodding: ------------------------------- Sq. Yd.
Vehicular Gates: --------------------------- Each Gate
Traffic Signal Equipment:

192
November 2019

a. Actuated Controllers -------------------------- Each

b. Vehicle Detectors ------------------------------- Each
c. Traffic Signal Heads ---------------------------- Each
d. Pedestrian Signal Heads ---------------------- Each
e. Luminaire Assemblies --------------------------- Each
f. Nonmetallic Rigid Conduit, Schedule 40 ----- L.F.
g. Metallic Rigid Conduit ---------------------------- L.F.
h. Feeder Wire ----------------------------------------- L.F.
i. Loop Wire --------------------------------------------- L.F.
j. Loop Wire In Duct ----------------------------------- L.F.
k. Signal Cable ----------------------------------------- L.F.
l. Ground Rod ------------------------------------------ Each
m. Electrical Conductor (Signals, Signs, etc.) -- L.F.

Other ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

193
November 2019

APPENDIX

194
November 2019

195
November 2019

196
November 2019

Rebar Markings

English Bar Nominal

Nominal Area Nominal Diameter
Size Weight
inch2 inch
Designation lb/ft

#3 0.11 0.376 0.375

#4 0.20 0.668 0.500
#5 0.31 1.043 0.625
#6 0.44 1.502 0.75
#7 0.6 2.044 0.875
#8 0.79 2.67 1
#9 1 3.4 1.128
#10 1.27 4.303 1.27
#11 1.56 5.313 1.41
#14 2.25 7.65 1.693
#18 4 13.6 2.257

197
November 2019

Metric Bar Nominal

Nominal Area Nominal Diameter
Size Weight
cm2 cm
Designation kg/m

#10 0.71 .52 0.95

#13 1.29 0.994 1.27
#16 2.00 1.55 1.59
#19 2.84 2.24 1.91
#22 3.87 3.041 2.22
#25 5.10 3.97 2.54
#29 6.45 5.06 2.87
#32 8.19 6.40 3.23
#36 10.06 7.90 3.58
#43 14.52 11.4 4.30
#57 25.81 20.2 5.73

198
November 2019

INSTRUCTIONS FOR IDENTIFICATION OF REINFORCEMENT

BAR MARKINGS
The specifications for billet steel, axle steel, and rail steel
reinforcement bars (AASHTO M 31M, M 42M, and M 53M
/ ASTM A 615M, A 616M, and A 617M, respectively)
require identification marks to be rolled into the surface
of one side of the bar to denote the producer’s mill
designation, bar size, type of steel, and, for Grade 420
(Grade 60), a grade mark indicating yield strength.
Grade 300 (Grade 40) bars show only three marks (no
grade mark) usually in the following order:
1st — Producing Mill (usually an initial)
2nd — Bar Size Number (10 mm - 36 mm [#3 - #11], 43
mm [#14], and 57 mm [#18])
3rd — Type Steel:
N for Billet
A for Axle
S for Billet meeting supplementary bend requirements
IR for Rail
W for Weldable steel ASTM A-706

Grade 420 (Grade 60) bars must also show a minimum

yield designation grade mark of either the number “4”
(“60”) or one grade mark line continued for at least five
deformation spaces.

A grade mark line is smaller than and between the two

main ribs, which are sometimes on the opposite side of
the bar. When a numerical grade is used, it is the 4th in
order.

199
November 2019

A grade mark line is smaller than and between the two main ribs, which are sometimes on
the opposite side of the bar. When a numerical grade is used, it is the 4th in order.

200
November 2019

REINFORCING STEEL
(UNCOATED AND EPOXY COATED BARS)

Alton Steel, Inc. Alton, Illinois – P

CMC Steel South Carolina Cayce, South Carolina - P

(formerly SMI

CMC Steel Texas (formerly SMI) Seguin, Texas – P

Gerdau AmeriSteel Beaumont, Texas – P (formerly North Star Steel)

Charlotte, North Carolina - P, F
Jackson, Tennessee - P, F
Jacksonville, Florida - P, F
Knoxville, Tennessee - P, F, E
Midlothian, Texas – P
Perth Amboy, New Jersey – P
Sand Springs, Oklahoma – P(formerly SheffieldSteel)
Sayreville, New Jersey – P, E
St. Paul, Minnesota – P, F (formerly North Star Steel)

Mid-American Steel Madill, Oklahoma – P

Nucor Bar Mill Group

Nucor Steel Birmingham, Inc. Birmingham, Alabama – P
Nucor Steel Jackson, Inc. Jackson, Mississippi – P
Nucor Steel - Texas Jewett, Texas – P
Nucor Steel Kankakee, Inc. Kankakee, Illinois – P

Rocky Mountain Steel Mills Pueblo, Colorado– P

P - Reinforcing Bar Producer F – Fabricator E - Epoxy Coater

201
November 2019

Gerdau AmeriSteel - Beaumont, Texas

Alton Steel, Inc. – Alton, Il.

202
November 2019

203
November 2019

Nucor Steel – Jackson, MS

Gerdau AmeriSteel - Midlothian, TX

204
November 2019

CMC South Carolina – Cayce, SC

205
November 2019

Mid

Effective January 1, 2009

American Steel & Wire (Madill, OK)

Nucor Steel
(Jewett, TX)
The dot under
the 4 is an
optional,
manufacturing
control marking.
Bars may have
more than one
dot.
Gerdau
Ameristeel,
Jackson, TN

206
November 2019

Gerdau Ameristeel – Charlotte, NC

ASTM Bolt Designations

207
November 2019

Tensile
ASTM Size strength,
standard range ksi Material Head marking

A307 1/4 thru 4 60 Low carbon steel

A325 1/2 thru 1 120 Medium carbon steel,

Type 1 1-1/8 thru 1-1/2 105 quenched & tempered

A325 1/2 thru 1 120 Low carbon

Type 2 1-1/8 thru 1-1/2 105 martensite steel,
quenched & tempered

A325 1/2 thru 1 120 Weathering steel,

Type 3 1-1/8 thru 1-1/2 105 quenched & tempered

A449 1/4 thru 1 120 Medium carbon steel,

1-1/8 thru 1-1/2 105 quenched & tempered
1-3/4 thru 3 90

A490 1/4 thru 1-1/2 150 Alloy steel,

Type 1 quenched & tempered

A490 1/4 thru 1-1/2 150 Weathering steel,

Type 3 quenched & tempered

Often one will find "extra" marks on a bolt head--marks in addition to those shown above.
Usually these marks indicate the bolt's manufacturer.
ASTM A325 Type 2 bolts have been discontinued, but are included above because they
can be found in existing structures. Their properties can be important in failure
investigations.

208
November 2019

SAE Bolt Designations

SAE Tensile
Grade Size strength,
No. range ksi Material Head marking

1 1/4 thru 1-1/2 60 Low or medium

carbon steel
2 1/4 thru 3/4 74
7/8 thru 1-1/2 60

5 1/4 thru 1 120 Medium carbon steel,

1-1/8 thru 1-1/2 105 quenched & tempered

5.2 1/4 thru 1 120 Low carbon

martensite steel,
quenched & tempered

7 1/4 thru 1-1/2 133 Medium carbon

alloy steel,
quenched & tempered

8 1/4 thru 1-1/2 150 Medium carbon

alloy steel,
quenched & tempered

209
November 2019

8.2 1/4 thru 1 150 Low carbon

martensite steel,
quenched & tempered

210
November 2019

211
November 2019

212
November 2019

Formed Fasteners Co.

Gaffney Bolt & Nut Co.

213
November 2019

COUNTY CODES

1 Arkansas 39 Lee
2 Ashley 40 Lincoln
3 Baxter 41 Little River
4 Benton 42 Logan

5 Boone 43 Lonoke
6 Bradley 44 Madison
7 Calhoun 45 Marion
8 Carroll 46 Miller
9 Chicot 47 Mississippi
10 Clark 48 Monroe
11 Clay 49 Montgomery
12 Cleburne 50 Nevada
13 Cleveland 51 Newton
14 Columbia 52 Ouachita
15 Conway 53 Perry
16 Craighead 54 Phillips
17 Crawford 55 Pike
18 Crittenden 56 Poinsett
19 Cross 57 Polk
20 Dallas 58 Pope
21 Desha 59 Prairie
22 Drew 60 Pulaski
23 Faulkner 61 Randolph
24 Franklin 62 St. Francis
25 Fulton 63 Saline
26 Garland 64 Scott
27 Grant 65 Searcy
28 Greene 66 Sebastian
29 Hempstead 67 Sevier
30 Hot Spring 68 Sharp
31 Howard 69 Stone
32 Independence 70 Union
33 Izard 71 Van Buren
34 Jackson 72 Washington
35 Jefferson 73 White
36 Johnson 74 Woodruff
37 Lafayette 75 Yell
38 Lawrence

214
November 2019

CALIBRATION OF ROLLING STRAIGHT EDGE

SCOPE
This method covers the calibration of the 10 foot Rolling Straight Edge and/or the
Hi/Low Detector.

APPARATUS
The rolling straight edge is a machine for detecting points on the surface of a
roadway which deviate from the prevalent level or grade. It is constructed for checking
both concrete and asphalt surfaces. Basically, the device consists of an I-beam body 10
feet long with 8" support wheels at the ends and a 6 " detector wheel at the mid-point. The
front 8" wheel is steerable so that the device can be controlled on the surface. The middle
wheel detects any vertical deviation of the surface from a straight line between the
supporting wheels mounted on t he device ends. The vertical deviations are shown by a
movable pointer over a visible scale. The scale is mounted above the detecting wheel and
centered on the I-beam in front of the steering handle. Variations or deviations are
magnified 16 times on the scale, which is graduated in 1/8 inch increments. This allows
for a deviation of up to 1/4 inch high or low to be measured.

CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT NEEDED

1. 11 foot I-Beam, straight
2. 12 feet of nylon cord
3. Set of six metal shims, marked accordingly
2 at 1/8 inch
2 at 3/16 inch
2 at 1/4 inch
4. 12 inch level

215
November 2019

PRE-CALIBRATION CHECK
1. Wheels (Two 8 inch wheels and one 6 inch wheel)
A. Check wheels for cleanness, they should have NO material clinging to
them.
B. Check wheels for roundness, smoothness, and proper diameter ( 8 inch
support wheels and 6 inch detector wheel).
C. Check wheel bushings' wear to determine excess slack and ease of
rotation.
D. Check and/or adjust scraper plates on all wheels to 1/16 inch clearance
between wheel surface and scraper plate.
E. Check and grease all wheels as needed.
2. I-Beam
A. Check I-beam for trueness and straightness ( This may be accomplished
by placing a 1/4 inch shim on each end of the I-beam and stretching
a nylon cord across the shims and measuring the distance from the
cord to the beam along the beam's entire length.
Note: Beam must be straight).
3. Scale and Pointer-Hand Assembly.
A. Check scale face for straightness and that it is clearly marked with
equally spaced divisions.
B. Check pointer-hand for trueness and freeness of operation.
C. Check all linkages between the detector wheel and the pointer hand
assembly for wear and that nothing is bent or binds during full
movement.
D. Check scale movement ( + and - ) of pointer-hand. This be
accomplished by blocking the front or rear support wheel off the
ground by at least 12 inches and moving the detector wheel up and
down.

216
November 2019

CALIBRATION
1. Place aluminum I-beam on flat level ground making sure the beam is level
and rests firmly on the ground over its entire length.
2. Place the rolling straight edge on the aluminum I-beam and place the 12
inch level across the straight edge close to the T -handle and observe that
the straight edge remains level during the calibration procedure.
3. Make sure the pointer-hand is now setting on zero without the use of any
shims (if pointer-hand is not setting on zero adjust the pointer-detector
assembly until the pointer-hand does read zero). After adjusting the
pointer-detector assembly you must recheck pointer-hand for full plus and
minus range movement.
4. Now check straight edge "High" readings. This is accomplished by placing
the 1/8 inch shim under the detector wheel and making sure the pointer
hand reads 1/8 inch, if the unit does not read the correct amount DO NOT
ADJUST THE POINTER-DETECTOR LINKAGE as this will move the zero
point. Check all the different size shims (3) under the detector wheel
making sure the pointer-hand reads correctly for each shim.
NOTE: If any reading is not correct go back to Pre-Calibration Check
Procedure and recheck for worn bearings and linkages.
5. Check straight edge "Low" reading by placing a 1/8 inch shim under each
of the support wheels, the straight edge should read 1/8 inch low. If the unit
does not read the correct amounts DO NOT ADJUST THE P OINTER-
DETECTOR LINKAGE as this will move the zero point. Check all the
different shims sizes (3) under the support wheels making sure the pointer-
hand reads correctly for each shim size. NOTE: If any reading is not correct
go back to Pre-Calibration or worn bearings and linkages.
Check Procedure and recheck.

217
November 2019

218
November 2019

STEEL PILING INSPECTION

The following information concerning proper identification of steel piling is forwarded for
use in inspection of steel piling delivered to a project:

H-Piles
805.03 (c) – Unless otherwise specified, steel piles shall consist of structural shapes of
the section shown on the plans and shall comply with AASHTO M 270, Grade 36 (250)

 AASHTO M 270 – “Material identification shall include the composition type for Grade
50W in addition to that required by AASHTO M 160 (ASTM A 6). “

 AASHTO M 160 (ASTM A 6) “Shapes shall be marked with the heat number, size
of section, length, and mill identification on each piece. The manufacturer’s name,
brand, or trademark shall be shown in raised letters at intervals along the length.
In addition, shapes shall be identified with the ASTM designation and grade, either
by marking each piece individually or, if bundled…….” (H-piles would not be
bundled)

 Color coding is required for AASHTO M 270, Grade 50 (ASTM A 572, Grade 50) –
green and yellow

Stenciling, stamping (steel die stencils), or substantial tags, applied by the

manufacturer are acceptable forms of identification marks. Any paint, chalk,
or crayon marks applied by hand are not acceptable for primary identification,
but may are considered supplementary. H-piles also require the
manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark be shown in raised letters.

219
November 2019

Steel Shell Piles

805.03 (d) – Unless otherwise specified, plain round steel shells shall comply with
ASTM A 252, Grade 2. Shells shall be welded or seamless steel pipe.
Steel shell piles shall be marked by the manufacturer near both ends of the
pile. Marking shall be in accordance with ASTM A 252.

 ASTM A 252 - Product Marking: “Each length of pipe piles shall be legibly marked
by stenciling, stamping, or rolling to show: the name or brand of the
manufacturer; the heat number; the process of manufacture (seamless, flash
welded, fusion welded, or electric resistance welded); the type of helical
seam (helical-lap or helical-butt), if applicable; the outside diameter, nominal
wall thickness, length, and weight per unit length; the specification
designation; and the grade.”

Stencils, stamps, or rolling of identification marks by the shell pile

manufacturer are the only acceptable forms of identification. Any marking by
hand such as chalk, paint, or crayon, is considered supplementary.

Overall – PILING FOR WHICH THE MANUFACTURER’S MARKING IS

ILLEGIBLE, IMPROPER, OR INCOMPLETE SHOULD BE
REJECTED AND NOT USED ON THE PROJECT.

220
November 2019

221
November 2019

222